196
Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Location ASPA Main Docks Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT ISSUED BY Engineering Services Department ALABAMA STATE PORT AUTHORITY James K. Lyons, Director & CEO Kay E. Ivey, Governor of Alabama

SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    0

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  

 

SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT

ISSUED BY

Engineering Services Department

ALABAMA STATE PORT AUTHORITY

James K. Lyons, Director & CEO

Kay E. Ivey, Governor of Alabama

 

 

Page 2: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade  

Location ASPA Main Docks  

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019   2 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION I ..................................................................... BID DOCUMENTS

DIVISION II ....................................................... CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

DIVISION III ........................................................... SPECIAL PROVISIONS

DIVISION IV ......................................................... GENERAL PROVISIONS

DIVISION V ........................................CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Page 3: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade  

Location ASPA Main Docks  

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019   3 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

 

BID DOCUMENTS

DIVISION I

INDEX

 

INVITATION FOR BIDS ............................................................................................... I-1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ................................................................................. I-2

PROPOSAL. ................................................................................................................ I-3

BID BOND ………………………………………………. .................................................. I-6

Page 4: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  I‐1 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

INVITATION TO BID

Sealed bids will be received via courier to the Alabama State Port Authority, 1400 Alabama State Docks Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on  Wednesday, September 18, 2019.      Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted bids will Not be accepted.  

MAIN DOCKS LIGHTING UPGRADE MOBILE, ALABAMA 

 The work consists principally of providing bonds, labor, materials, equipment, and supervision necessary for the providing and installing new LED Light Fixtures and Appurtenances indicated in the Contract Documents.  Specifications, proposal forms, bid and performance bond forms, and plans are on file in the office of the Engineering Services Department at the Alabama State Port Authority, Mobile, Alabama.  You may contact the Project Manager Rick Smith P.E. for additional information by email at [email protected].  Complete Plans and Specification sets will be furnished electronically to qualified prospective bidders upon payment to Alabama State Port Authority of One Hundred ($100.00) Dollars (check or money order only) per set, none of which will be refunded.    A Mandatory Pre‐Bid Meeting and Site Visit is scheduled for Wednesday, August 21, 2019 to start Promptly at 8:00 AM in the ASPA International Trade Center Building, 250 North Water Street, Mobile Alabama in the Kilian Room on the First Floor.   Bidder attendance is MANDATORY.  A Guarantee will be required with each bid as follows:  At least five (5%) percent of the amount bid, but in no event more than Ten Thousand ($10,000) Dollars, shall be furnished in the form of a certified check or bid bond payable to the Alabama State Port Authority.  A Performance Bond in an amount not less than the sum bid will be required at the signing of the contract and, in addition, a bond in an amount not less than One Hundred (100%) percent of the contract price, insuring payment of all labor and material.  No bid will be considered unless the bidder, whether resident or non‐resident of Alabama, is properly qualified to submit a proposal for this work in accordance with all applicable laws of the State of Alabama.  This shall include evidence of holding a current license as required from the State Licensing Board for General Contractors, Montgomery, Alabama.  Also, non‐residents of the State must show evidence of having qualified with the Secretary of State to do business in AL.  Bids will be publicly opened at 2:00 PM CDT , Wednesday, September 18, 2019 in the Killian Room at the ASPA International Trade Center, 250 North Water Street, Mobile, Alabama.    The right is reserved, as the interest of the Alabama State Port Authority may require, to reject any and all bids and to waive informalities in bids received. 

Page 5: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  I‐2 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.0 ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS 

All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Engineer 

in writing.  Replies will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded as having received the bidding documents.  All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents.  Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding.  Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 

 

2.0 PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 

No proposal will be considered from any Contractor unless he is licensed to do work in the State of 

Alabama and has complied with the requirements of Paragraph SP‐04 and SP‐05 of the DIVISION III Special Provisions. The classification for the Alabama State General Contractor’s License shall be Specialty Construction (E) Electrical. 

 

3.0 SUBMISSION OF PROPOSALS 

Before submitting his proposal, the Contractor shall comply with the following: 

(a)  The Proposals shall be filled in ink on the form provided herein and all blank spaces in the form shall be fully filled.  The signature shall be in long hand and the complete form shall be without interlineations, alteration or erasure. 

  (b)  If the Bidder is a corporation organized in a state other than Alabama, attach to the Bid a certificate from the Secretary of State showing that the Corporation is qualified to transact business in Alabama. 

   (c)  Attach a certified check or Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the Bid, but not more than $10,000 made payable to the Alabama State Port Authority. 

   (d)  Non‐resident (out of state) Contractors shall attach all items included by SP‐6. 

   (e)  Attach a copy of the State Contractor’s License to Bid. 

 

One copy of Item (a) through (e) should be placed in a sealed envelope with the Bidder’s Name, Contractor’s License number, the Project, and the time and date of bid opening shown on the outside.  

   

Page 6: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  I‐3 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

Proposal of: 

Address: 

Date: 

To:    STATE OF ALABAMA, Alabama State Port Authority, Mobile, Alabama 

 

Gentlemen: 

The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that he has examined the site of the work and informed himself fully in regard to all conditions pertaining to the place where the work is to be done; that he has examined the plans and specifications for the work and contractual documents relative thereto, and has read all Special Provisions and Specifications furnished; and that he has satisfied himself relative to all aspects of the work to be performed and especially to those factors affecting cost, progress, or performance. 

The Bidder proposes and agrees, if this bid is accepted, to contract with the Owner in the form of contract specified, to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, tools, apparatus, means of transportation, labor and incidentals to perform in a satisfactory manner, the work described in the Contract Specifications and Drawings for the Alabama State Port Authority, for the prices listed below to complete: 

MAIN DOCKS LIGHTING UPGRADE PROJECT 

 MOBILE, ALABAMA 

In full and complete accordance with the shown, noted, described and reasonable intended requirements of the plans, specifications and contract documents to the full and entire satisfaction of the Owner with a definite understanding that no money will be allowed for extra work except as set forth in the attached contract documents. 

It is agreed that the description under each item, being briefly stated, implies, although it does not mention, all incidentals and that the prices stated are intended to cover all such work materials and incidentals as constitute Bidder’s obligation as described in the specifications and any details not specifically mentioned, but evidently included in the contract shall be compensated for the item which most logically includes it. 

Bidder agrees that he will commence the work within the time allotted by the Contract Documents with an adequate force, and equipment and that the work will be completed within Time Schedule outlined in Special Provisions Article SP‐3. 

Bidder accepts the provisions of the Contract Documents as to Liquidated Damages in the event of failure to complete the work on time. 

 

Page 7: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  I‐4 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

The Bidder further agrees that, in case of failure on his part to execute the Contract and required bonds within Ten (10) Calendar Days from the date written Notice of Award if mailed or otherwise delivered to the Bidder, the certified check or bid bond accompanying this bid and the monies payable thereon shall be paid into the funds of the Owner not as penalty, but as a liquidation of a reasonable portion of the damages incurred by the Owner due to the Bidder’s failure to execute the Contract. 

 

See Attachment A  –  BID TABLE ‐ SCHEDULE OF PRICES 

 

 

 

 

   

Page 8: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  I‐5 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

 

I, the undersigned bidder, hereby acknowledge receipt of the following addenda: 

 

ADDENDUM NO.__________ 

 

ADDENDUM NO.__________  

 

ADDENDUM NO.__________ 

 

ADDENDUM NO.__________ 

 

 

Contractor’s Signature:  ___________________________________________________________________________  Contractor Company___________________________________________________________________   ___________________________________    __________________________________    _________ Name                                                                       Title                                                                            Date 

 

 

 

 

 

Page 9: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019  I‐6 | P a g e  

  

Form ENG-FR-004 Spec Book Div 1 Template Last Revised 10/31/11

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, undersigned, ______________________ 

________________________ as Principal, and _______________________________________ as Surety, are hereby held and bound unto The Alabama State Port Authority as OWNER in the Penal sum of _______________________________ for the payment of which will and truly be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors and assigns.  Signed, the ______ day of ___________________, 20___.   

The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the Alabama State Port Authority a certain BID, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract in writing, for the Lighting Upgrade Project Mobile, Alabama, Project No. ASPA‐TS‐2018‐01. 

NOW, THEREFORE, 

(a)  If said BID shall be rejected, or 

(b)  If said BID shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form of Contract attached hereto (Properly completed in accordance with said BID) and shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said BID, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the panel amount of this obligation as herein stated. 

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its BOND shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of time within which the OWNER may accept such BID; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.  

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above. 

   

Principal   

Surety   

By    

Page 10: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019 1 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

DIVISION II

INDEX

 

PERFORMANCE BOND .............................................................................................. II-1

LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND .................................................................................. II-3

ACKNOWLEDGMENT FOR CHANGE ORDERS ........................................................ II-5

CONTRACT ................................................................................................................. II-6

Page 11: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 II‐1 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That: (Name of Contractor)

(Address of Contractor)

(City, State, Zip)

and _________________________________________________________________________ (Name of Surety)

_____________________________________________________________________________

(Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Alabama State Port Authority hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of DOLLARS, ($ _________________) (100% of the Contract Amount) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the OWNER, dated the ______ day of ___________, 20 ___, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of:

MAIN DOCKS LIGHTING UPGRADE PROJECT

MOBILE, ALABAMA NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of said contract during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without notice to the Surety and during the guaranty period, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may insure in making good any default, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract of the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS.

I, a(n) (state of domicile) corporation, hereinafter called Principal,

Page 12: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 II‐2 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed this _____ day of _____________, 20_____. ATTEST: _______________________________

Principal

_______________________________ _____________________________(s) (Principal) Secretary (SEAL)

_______________________________ _______________________________ (Witness as to Principal) (Address) _______________________________ _______________________________ Surety ATTEST: _______________________________ (Surety) Secretary (SEAL)

_______________________________ BY: ___________________________ Witness as to Surety Attorney-in-fact

_______________________________ _______________________________ (Address) (Address)

_______________________________ _______________________________ NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of CONTRACT.

If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND.

Page 13: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 II‐3 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That: (Name of Contractor)

(Address of Contractor)

(City, State, Zip)

and ______________________________________________________________________ (Name of Surety)

__________________________________________________________________________

(Address of Surety)

_________________________________________________________________ (City, State, Zip)

hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Alabama State Port Authority hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of DOLLARS, ($ _________________) (100% of the Contract Amount) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the OWNER, dated the ______ day of ___________, 20 ___, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of:

MAIN DOCKS LIGHTING UPGRADE PROJECT

MOBILE, ALABAMA

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payments to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials or performing labor in the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, fuel, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumer or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.  PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract of the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS.

I, a(n) (state of domicile) corporation, hereinafter called Principal,

Page 14: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 II‐4 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed this _______ day of _____________, 20____.

ATTEST: _______________________________ Principal _______________________________ BY: _________________________(s) (Principal) Secretary (SEAL)

_______________________________ _______________________________ Witness as to Surety Principal (Address)

_______________________________ _______________________________ (Address) _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ Surety ATTEST: _______________________________ BY: ___________________________ Witness as to Surety Attorney-In-Fact _______________________________ _______________________________ (Address) (Address) _______________________________ _______________________________ NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of CONTRACT. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND.   

Page 15: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 II‐5 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR CHANGE ORDERS TO: ALABAMA STATE PORT AUTHORITY RE: MAIN DOCKS LIGHTING UPGRADE PROJECT Gentlemen: In order to avoid the necessity of extensive amendment to the referenced Contract, the undersigned hereby acknowledges that the following conditions are those for which change orders are allowed under the Bid law: 1. Unusual and difficult circumstances which arise during the course of the execution of the

Contract which could not have been reasonably foreseen. 2. Where competitive bidding for the new work will be to the serious detriment of the Owner. 3. Emergencies arising during the course of work. 4. Changes or alterations provided for in the original bid and original Contract. 5. The Contractor also acknowledges that he has read paragraph 50-04 (EXTRA WORK) and

60-17 of the (CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND DISPUTES) of the General Provisions and agrees that “If for any reason the Contractor deems that additional compensation is due him for work or materials not clearly provided in the Contract, plans, or specifications or previously authorized as extra work, he shall notify the Engineer in writing of his intention to claim such additional compensation before he begins the work on which he bases his claim.”

BY:

CONTRACTOR

DATE TITLE  

 

 

Page 16: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01 July 2019 II‐6 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

CONTRACT

THIS AGREEMENT, made and executed on this _______ day of the month of __________________, Two Thousand and ____________ (20___), by and between The Alabama State Port Authority, and ____ Contractor, domiciled in the state of , Party of the Second Part, and hereinafter designated as “CONTRACTOR,” WITNESSETH, that in consideration of the covenants and agreements herein contained, to be performed by the parties hereto and of the payments hereinafter agreed to be made, it is mutually agreed as follows:

The CONTRACTOR shall and will provide and furnish all equipment and labor, and perform the work required to build, construct, and complete in a thorough and workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the Alabama State Port Authority:

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Project # ASPA-TS-2018-01

Hereinafter called the project, for the base Contract price of ____________________________

___________________________________ DOLLARS, ($__________________) and all extra work in connection therewith, and in accordance with plans, specifications, and Proposal, which are made a part thereof as fully as is set out herein, and hereby becomes a part of this Contract.

It is agreed and understood that the Alabama State Port Authority shall pay, and the Contractor shall receive, the full compensation for the work performed in accordance with the Specifications.

The project shall commence and will be completed in accordance with Paragraph SP-03 of the Special Provisions.

This contract shall become effective immediately upon, and as of the date all necessary parties hereto have approached and signed the same.

By signing this contract, the contracting parties affirm, for the duration of the agreement, that they will not violate federal immigration law or knowingly employ, hire for employment, or continue to employ an unauthorized alien within the State of Alabama. Furthermore, a contracting party found to be in violation of this provision shall be deemed in breach of the agreement and shall be responsible for all damages resulting therefrom.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties of these presents have executed this Agreement in the year and day first above written. WITNESS: Alabama State Port Authority ______________________________ BY:____________________________________ WITNESS: Contractor Party of the Second Part ______________________________ BY:____________________________________

Page 17: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019 1 | P a g e  

 

SPECIAL PROVISIONS

DIVISION III INDEX

SP-01 – DESCRIPTION OF WORK………………………………………………………. ............ .III-1 SP-02 – OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS………………………………………. ........... …III-1 SP-03 – COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION…………………………………… ............ .…III-1 SP-04 – QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS…………………………………………… ............. ……III-1 SP-05 – ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF BIDS……………………………… .......... ………III-1 SP-06 – NON-RESIDENT (OUT-OF-STATE) CONTRACTORS………………… .......... ………III-2 SP-07– INDEMNIFICATION……………………………………………………… ............... ………III-2 SP-08 – SUPERVISION AND OFFICE TRAILER………………………………………………….III-2 SP-9 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE……………………………………… ............. ….III-3 SP-10 – METHOD OF PAYMENT…………………………………………………… ……………. III-3 SP-11 – INSURANCE ........................................................................................................ …...III-3 SP-12 – TEMPORARY WATER AND ELECTRICAL POWER. .............................................. ..III-3 SP-13 – GUARANTEE ....................................................................................................... …...III-3 SP-14 – CPM PROJECT SCHEDULE……………………………………………………………...III-3 SP-15 – PORT ACCESS CREDENTIALS ......................................................................... …...III-4 SP-16 - POINT-TO-POINT ILLUMINATION CALCULATIONS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS. ....... ..III-4 SP-17 - LIGHTING UPGRADE LOCATIONS RETURN TO PORT OPERATIONS . ........ ..III-4 SP-18 - ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS . ............................................. ..III-4 SP-19 - UPLIGHT AND LIGHT TRESPASS . ...................................................................... ..III-5 SP-20 - EXISTING DRAWINGS. ............................................................................................ ..III-5 SP-21 - FAMILIARITY WITH SITE, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, & REQUIREMENTS. ...... ..III-5 SP-22 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE FOR CONTROLS........................................................... ..III-6

Page 18: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019 III‐1 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11)  

SP-01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The work consists principally of providing bonds, labor, materials, equipment, supervision, insurance and incidentals necessary for LED Lighting Upgrade as indicated in the Contract Plans and Specifications. SP-02 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS

The Alabama State Port Authority will utilize its Sales Tax Exemption status on this project. SP-03 COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION

The Contractor will be required to commence work under this contract in accordance with DIVISION IV GENERAL PROVISIONS Article 90-02 (NOTICE TO PROCEED), to prosecute said work with faithfulness and energy, and to complete the entire project within 240 Calendar Days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. The time stated for final completion shall include final clean-up of the premises. Failure to complete work on schedule shall initiate liquidated damages, which will be assessed in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 20-13 (LIQUIDATED DAMAGES) of DIVISION IV, GENERAL PROVISIONS. 

SP-04 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

In addition to the requirements of Article 20-01 and 20-03 of Division IV, GENERAL PROVISIONS, the Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional bids will not be accepted.

SP-05 ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF BIDS

The Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities. All bidders must be licensed to operate as contractors in the State of Alabama. Attention of bidders is directed to Chapter 8 of Title 23 of the Code of Alabama, 1975, and Amendments thereto, relating to the licensing of General Contractors. No bid will be accepted from anyone except a qualified Contractor, licensed by the State Licensing Board for General Contractors. In addition, non-residents of the State must show evidence of having qualified with the Secretary of State to do business in Alabama. SP-06 NON-RESIDENT (OUT-OF-STATE) CONTRACTORS

Preference shall be given to resident contractors, and non-resident bidders domiciled in a state having laws granting preference to local contractors shall be awarded Alabama public contracts the same as Alabama contractors bidding under similar circumstances; and resident contractors in Alabama are to be granted preference over non-residents in awarding of contracts in the same manner and to the same extent as provided by the laws of the state of domicile of the non-resident.

Page 19: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

  III‐2 | P a g e  

Non-resident bidders must accompany any written bid documents with a written opinion of any attorney at law licensed to practice law in such non-resident bidders’ state of domicile, as to the preferences, if any or none, granted by the law of that state to its own business entities whose principal places of business are in that State in the letting of any or all public contracts. SP-07 INDEMNIFICATION

To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Engineer, and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including, but not limited to, attorney’s fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss, or expense (1) is attributed to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph SP-07. In any and all claims against the Owner, the Engineer or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification under this Paragraph SP-07, shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under workers’ or workmen’s compensation acts, or other employee benefits acts. SP-08 SUPERVISION

The Contractor shall place a competent Superintendent on the Project who shall have experience in the type of work being performed under this Contract. A resume of the Superintendent’s experience shall be submitted for review prior to the placement of the named person on the project. The Contractor shall also submit an Organizational Chart, which shall clearly show the Contractor’s personnel assigned to the Project and the position that they hold. The chart shall also define the persons of contact with the Owner and the Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to request changes in supervision for incompetent actions or other reasons of due cause. Once the Contractor is notified in writing of a request to replace the superintendent, he shall do so within five (5) calendar days of such request. The Contractor’s assigned Superintendent shall have responsibility for the day-to-day operations of the work and shall be the on-site Safety Officer responsible for implementation of the Contractor’s Safety Program unless another named person is so assigned. The assigned Superintendent shall Remain on the Project site while work under the Contract is being performed. In the Superintendent’s absence from the site, another named person shall be responsible for all aspects of the work. Notification of the name of the individual shall be filed with the Owner and Engineer. The Contractor shall not reassign a Superintendent without the acknowledgement and approval of the Owner.

Page 20: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

  III‐3 | P a g e  

SP-09 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE

A Project Superintendent of the Contractor shall be on the site at All times work is being conducted as required by paragraph 90-01 (SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT) of DIVISION IV. A Cellular Telephone number shall be given to the ASPA Project Manager and Engineer so he can contact the Representative during and after working hours in case of an emergency and for coordination. SP-10 METHOD OF PAYMENT

As specified in Paragraph 100-06. SP–11 INSURANCE

See Attachment B. SP-12 TEMPORARY WATER AND ELECTRICAL POWER

The responsibility shall be upon the Contractor to provide and maintain at his own expense an adequate supply of water of a quality suitable for his use for construction and domestic consumption. At his own expense, he shall install and maintain any necessary water supply connections and piping. However, he shall do so only at such locations and in such workmanship manner as may be authorized by the OWNER. Before Final Acceptance, temporary connections and piping installations by the Contractor shall be removed in a workmanship manner to the satisfaction of the OWNER. All electrical current required by the Contractor shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense. All temporary connections for electricity shall be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, install a meter to determine the amount of current used by him/her and will pay for such electricity at prevailing rates. SP-13 GUARANTEE (WARRANTY)

The Contractor shall furnish to the Alabama State Port Authority a Minimum Five (5) Year Written Guarantee, except where specified elsewhere, issued starting from the date of Final Acceptance. This Guarantee shall cover any defective materials or workmanship on the entire project including LED Luminaires, Controls, and Components. Manufacturers’ Warranties that exceed 5 Years shall name ASPA as Owner and be included in Close-Out Documentation. All costs shall be included in the bid..                                                                                                                                                    An Optional Additive Alternative for Light Fixtures and Components’ Ten (10) Warranties shall be included in the Bid Documents. SP-14 CPM PROJECT SCHEDULE

The Contractor shall prepare a detailed CPM Project Schedule using Microsoft Project and the schedule shall show all items of work necessary to bring the project to completion. The Contractor shall submit electronic copies of his Progress Schedule updated Weekly by email to reflect the status of the work. These updates shall be submitted in conjunction with the Monthly Progress Payment Request and shall be a requisite for the payment request to be processed.

Page 21: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

  III‐4 | P a g e  

Preliminary Project Schedule shall be provided in Bid with a Start Date as of One Month after Bid Date. Actual Start Date will be adjusted when the Notice to Proceed is issued. SP-15 PORT ACCESS CREDENTIALS

See Attachment D. SP-16 POINT-TO-POINT ILLUMINATION CALCULATIONS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS

Point-to-Point Illumination Calculations on 10 foot maximum spacing for Exterior and Interiors shall be required for Berth E South Warehouse Interior and South B Warehouse Exterior for thorough evaluation and compliance with requirements for All Locations for Light Fixture Substitutions. Noncompliance will Disqualify Bid.

Low Bidder will be required to provide Lighting Calculations for All other Interior, Exterior, and Site Locations where Light Fixture Substitutions are proposed.

Bidder shall be fully responsible for equal or better illumination at all interior, site, and exterior locations.

Noncompliance will require Bidder to remediate any and all shortcomings at no additional cost to initial Project Bid Cost. All Design Costs shall be included in Bid.

Detailed Clear Technical Narrative for Controls substitutions shall be provided with Technical Submittal for Each Interior and Exterior Location and Roadway Section shall be Required to indicate compliance and for evaluation of Bid. Noncompliance will Disqualify Bid. See attached Specifications for Bid’s Lighting Equipment and Controls Submittal and Lighting Calculation Requirements.

SP-17 LIGHTING UPGRADE LOCATIONS RETURN TO PORT OPERATIONS

Lighting shall be available for immediate use by ASPA immediately after it has been ASPA Witness Tested and Approved to meet illumination requirements in order to allow Port Operations to resume in that Location. Parts of Warehouses, Docks, and Roadway shall be finalized and returned to Port Operations as soon as possible. SP-18 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical, Lighting, and Controls Specifications shall be applied as to the Contract Requirements of this Project including the Quality Assurance and Equipment and subsections. See Attachments.

Page 22: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

  III‐5 | P a g e  

SP-19 UPLIGHT AND LIGHT TRESPASS

Exterior Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings for LZ3:

1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed. Indicate compliance in Bidders Naratives and Submittals.

2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0. 3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which

luminaire is placed. Indicate compliance at All Exterior Locations in Submittals. 4. Lighting Designs shall comply with IES TM-15 requirements. 5. Shielding and/or Cutoff Optics as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15.

Detailed Clear Technical Narrative with Fixtures’ Technical Cutsheets for each Exterior Location and Roadway Sections shall be included in Submittals to indicate compliance. SP-20 EXISTING DRAWINGS

. The best available Scanned Drawings shall be provided to each Bidder that attends Mandatory Meeting. They will be posted at a secure ftp site for downloading due to file sizes. Contact ASPA PM. Some AutoCAD Drawings are available for some locations. SP-21 FAMILIARITY WITH SITE, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, & REQUIREMENTS It is the responsibility of the Bidder to visit the Project site and become Thoroughly Familiar with all applicable existing conditions. This responsibility extends to any and all subcontractors employed or intended to be employed by the successful Bidder. It is furthermore the responsibility of the Bidder’s Team to examine the Contract Documents and become Thoroughly Familiar with same, and to insure that said familiarity extends to any and all subcontractors as referenced above. No claim for extra compensation shall be entertained for Work required to be done which a Thorough Examination or Examination of the Site and/or the Contract Documents would have revealed as necessary to accomplish the purpose intended or indicated within the Contract Documents for a Complete and Functional Turn Key Project at All Locations included in the Project. This includes any modifications to existing electrical system and/or components required to accommodate the Lighting Upgrades and Controls.

See As-Built Drawings for Additional Information and Requirements; Field Verify Voltages and Fixture Types prior to ordering equipment; Electrical Modifications to utilize existing Voltages shall be included in Cost;

Page 23: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

  III‐6 | P a g e  

All Fixtures indicated shall be Replaced One for One and reconnected to existing Power Circuits and Controls Unless Additive Aleternate Controls Option is selected; Include All Controls and Surge Protection Modications Costs required to accomodate change to LED Fixtures. Field Verify; All Exterior Fixtures shall be Wet Location Rated and suitable for a Saltwater Port Environment prone to Hurricanes; All Interior and Under Canopy Fixtures shall be Damp Location Rated and suitable for a Saltwater Port Environment prone to Hurricanes; All Project Costs shall be Included for Turn Key Installation. SP-22 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE FOR CONTROLS Bid shall include completed Bid Table for Additive Alternate for Controls. Noncompliance will disqualify Bid. ASPA reserves the right to select which locations will have New Controls System installed based upon cost and useafullness for each location as determined by ASPA Project Manager.

Submittals shall include Descriptive Narrative for Each Location's New Controls proposed installation. All Project Costs shall be Included for Turn Key Installation at Each Location. All Exterior Fixtures Integral Controls shall be Wet Location Rated and suitable for a Saltwater Port Environment. All Interior and Under Canopy Fixtures Integral Controls shall be Damp Location Rated and suitable for a Saltwater Port Environment prone to Hurricanes;

Page 24: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019 1 | P a g e  

 

GENERAL PROVISIONS, CLAUSES, REQUIREMENTS AND COVENANTS

DIVISION IV

INDEX

SUBSECTION PAGE SECTION 10  DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................ IV‐1 

SECTION 20  BID REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS ............................................................. IV‐5 

20-01  PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ................................................................................. IV‐5 

20-02  CONTENTS OF BID FORMS .............................................................................................. IV‐5 

20-03  ISSUANCE OF BID FORMS ............................................................................................... IV‐5 

20-04 INTERPRETATION OF ESTIMATED BID QUANTITIES ............................................... IV‐5 

20-05 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE ......................................... IV‐5 

20-06 PREPARATION OF BID ...................................................................................................... IV‐6 

20-07 IRREGULAR BIDS ............................................................................................................... IV‐6 

20-08 BID GUARANTY ................................................................................................................... IV‐6 

20-09 DELIVERY OF BID ............................................................................................................... IV‐7 

20-10 WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF BIDS.......................................................................... IV‐7 

20-11 PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS .............................................................................................. IV‐7 

20-12 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. IV‐7 

20-13 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES .................................................................................................... IV‐7 

20-14  OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS ............................................................................. IV‐8 

SECTION 30  AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT ........................................................ IV‐12 

30-01 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS ............................................................................................. IV‐12 

30-02 AWARD OF CONTRACT .................................................................................................. IV‐12 

30-03 CANCELLATION OF AWARD .......................................................................................... IV‐12 

30-04 RETURN OF BID GUARANTY ......................................................................................... IV‐12 

30-05 REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT BONDS .................................................................. IV‐12 

Page 25: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      2 | P a g e  

 

30-06 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT .......................................................................................... IV‐13 

30-07 APPROVAL OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................ IV‐13 

30-08 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT ............................................................................ IV‐13 

SECTION 40  INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................ IV‐14 

40-01  INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................ IV‐14 

40-02  CONTRACTOR COVERAGE ............................................................................................ IV‐14 

40-03  COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ............................................................................. IV‐14 

40-04  OWNER’S AND CONTRACTOR’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY - .................................. IV‐14 

40-05  BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ............................................................................. IV‐14 

40-06 WORKERS COMPENSATION ......................................................................................... IV‐14 

40-07  OCEAN MARINE COVERAGE ......................................................................................... IV‐15 

40-08  RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY ............................................................................. IV‐15 

40-09  BUILDER’S RISK or INSTALLATION FLOATER (to be determined per project) ..... IV‐15 

40-10  PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE ..................................................................... IV‐15 

SECTION 50  SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................... IV‐16 

50-01 INTENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................... IV‐16 

50-02 ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES ............................................................... IV‐16 

50-03 OMITTED ITEMS ................................................................................................................ IV‐16 

50-04 EXTRA WORK .................................................................................................................... IV‐16 

50-05 MAINTENANCE OF COMMERCE ................................................................................... IV‐17 

50-06 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES ..................................................................... IV‐17 

50-07 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND IN THE WORK ............................... IV‐18 

50-08 FINAL CLEANING UP ........................................................................................................ IV‐18 

SECTION 60  CONTROL OF WORK ............................................................................................... IV‐19 

60-01 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER .................................................................................. IV‐19 

60-02 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... IV‐19 

60-03 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ....................... IV‐19 

60-04 COOPERATION OF THE CONTRACTOR ..................................................................... IV‐20 

60-05 COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS ............................................................. IV‐20 

60-06 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AND STAKES.................................................................... IV‐20 

60-07 AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT ......................................................... IV‐21 

60-08 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS ............................................................. IV‐21 

60-09 INSPECTION OF THE WORK ......................................................................................... IV‐21 

Page 26: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      3 | P a g e  

 

60-10 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK ............................ IV‐22 

60-11 LOAD RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................................................... IV‐22 

60-12 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................ IV‐22 

60-13 FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE WORK ............................................................................. IV‐22 

60-14 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE .................................................................................................. IV‐23 

60-15 FINAL CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION ......................................................................... IV‐23 

60-16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE ....................................................................................................... IV‐23 

60-17 CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND DISPUTES ............................................................ IV‐23 

SECTION 70  CONTROL OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................... IV‐25 

70-01 SOURCE OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS .......................................... IV‐25 

70-02 SAMPLES, TESTS, AND CITED SPECIFICATIONS ................................................... IV‐25 

70-03 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE .............................................................................. IV‐25 

70-04 PLANT INSPECTION ......................................................................................................... IV‐26 

70-05 ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE AND LABORATORY ..................................................... IV‐26 

70-06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ............................................................................................. IV‐26 

70-07 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS ....................................................................................... IV‐26 

70-08 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIAL .................................................................................. IV‐27 

70-09 RECEIVING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... IV‐27 

SECTION 80  LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO PUBLIC ................................ IV‐28 

80-01 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED ............................................................................................... IV‐28 

80-02 PERMITS, LICENSES, AND TAXES ............................................................................... IV‐28 

80-03 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES ........................................... IV‐28 

80-04 RESTORATION OF SURFACES DISTURBED BY OTHERS ..................................... IV‐28 

80-05 SANITARY, HEALTH, AND SAFETY PROVISIONS .................................................... IV‐29 

80-06 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY ........................................................................ IV‐29 

80-07 BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, AND HAZARD MARKINGS ................................ IV‐29 

80-08 USE OF EXPLOSIVES ...................................................................................................... IV‐29 

80-09 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND LANDSCAPE ............. IV‐30 

80-10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS .................................................................. IV‐30 

80-11 THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY CLAUSE ........................................................................ IV‐30 

80-12 OPENING SECTIONS OF THE WORK FOR OCCUPANCY ...................................... IV‐30 

80-13 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK ....................................................... IV‐31 

80-14  CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY SERVICE AND FACILITIES OF OTHERS ........................................................................................................................................... IV‐31 

Page 27: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      4 | P a g e  

 

80-15 FURNISHING RIGHTS-OF-WAY ..................................................................................... IV‐32 

80-16 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS .......................................................... IV‐32 

80-17 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS ................................................................................... IV‐32 

80-18 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ................................................................................. IV‐33 

80-19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS ................................................... IV‐33 

SECTION 90  PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ........................................................................ IV‐34 

90-01 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT ........................................................................................ IV‐34 

90-02 NOTICE TO PROCEED ..................................................................................................... IV‐34 

90-03 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ................................................................................. IV‐34 

90-04 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS ....................................................................................... IV‐34 

90-05 CHARACTER OF WORKERS, METHODS AND EQUIPMENT ................................. IV‐34 

90-06 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF THE WORK ............................................................. IV‐35 

90-07 DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME .................................... IV‐36 

90-08 FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME ............................................................................... IV‐37 

90-09 CONTRACT DEFAULT ...................................................................................................... IV‐37 

90-10 CONTRACT TERMINATION ............................................................................................ IV‐38 

SECTION 100  MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................................... IV‐40 

100-01 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES .............................................................................. IV‐40 

100-02 SCOPE OF PAYMENT .................................................................................................... IV‐42 

100-03 COMPENSATION FOR ALTERED QUANTITIES ...................................................... IV‐42 

100-04 PAYMENT FOR OMITTED ITEMS ................................................................................ IV‐42 

100-05 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK ....................................... IV‐43 

100-06 PARTIAL PAYMENT ........................................................................................................ IV‐44 

100-07 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND ..................................................................... IV‐44 

100-08 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT .............................................................................................. IV‐45 

100-09 WITHHOLDING FOR CLAIMS AND LITIGATION ...................................................... IV‐45 

100-10 FINAL PAYMENT ............................................................................................................. IV‐46 

100-11 RIGHT OF AUDIT ............................................................................................................. IV‐46 

Page 28: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019 IV‐1 | P a g e  

 

SECTION 10 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS Whenever the following terms are used in these specifications, in the Contract, in any documents or other instruments pertaining to construction where these specifications govern, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows: 10-01 AASHTO. The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, the successor association of AASHO.

10-02 ACCESS ROAD. The right-of-way, the roadway and all improvements constructed thereon connecting the site of work to a public highway.

10-03 ADVERTISEMENT. A public announcement, as required by local law, inviting bids for work to be performed and materials to be furnished.

10-04 ALDOT SPECS. The State of Alabama Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, latest edition.

10-05 AISC. The American Institute of Steel Construction.

10-06 AREA. American Railway Engineering Association.

10-07 ASA. American Standards Association.

10-08 ASTM. The American Society for Testing and Materials.

10-09 AWARD. The acceptance, by the OWNER, of the successful bidder's Bid.

10-10 AWPI. American Wood Preservers Institute.

10-11 BIDDER (PROPOSER). Any individual, partnership, firm or corporation, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative, who submits a Bid Proposal for the work contemplated.

10-12 CALENDAR DAY. Every day shown on the calendar.

10-13 CHANGE ORDER. A written order to the Contractor covering changes in the plans, specifications, or Bid quantities and establishing the basis of payment and Contract time adjustment, if any, for the work affected by such changes. The work, covered by a change order, shall be within the scope of the Contract.

10-14 COMMERCE. The prime business of the OWNER, consisting of the transshipping and storage of goods and materials by highway, rail, barge, and ship.

10-15 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER (SUPERINTENDENT). The individual authorized by the OWNER to be responsible for construction management supervision of the Contract work and acting directly or through an authorized representative.

10-16 CONTRACT. The written agreement covering the work to be performed. The awarded Contract shall include, but is not limited to: The Advertisement; The Contract Form; The Bid; The Performance Bond; The Payment Bond; any required insurance certificates; The Specifications; The Plans; Change Orders and any addenda issued to bidders.

Page 29: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐2 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

10-17 CONTRACT ITEM (PAY ITEM). A specific unit of work for which a price is provided in the Contract.

10-18 CONTRACT TIME. The number of calendar days or working days, stated in the special provisions, allowed for completion of the Contract, including authorized time extensions. If a calendar date of completion is stated in the Bid, in lieu of a number of calendar or working days, the Contract shall be completed by that date.

10-19 CONTRACTOR. The individual, partnership, firm or corporation primarily liable for the acceptable performance of the work Contracted and for the payment of all legal debts pertaining to the work who acts directly or through lawful agents or employees to complete the Contract work.

10-20 DEPARTMENT. The Alabama State Port Authority.

10-21 DIRECTOR. The Director of the Alabama State Port Authority, as constituted under the laws of Alabama.

10-22 ENGINEER. The individual duly authorized by the OWNER to be responsible for Engineering supervision of the Contract work and acting directly or through an authorized representative. ASPA Project Manager has the same authorization.

10-23 EQUIPMENT. All machinery, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep and maintenance, and also all tools and apparatus necessary for the proper construction and acceptable completion of the work.

10-24 EXTRA WORK. An item of work not provided for in the awarded Contract is previously modified by change order or supplemental agreement, but which is found by the Engineer to be necessary to complete the work within the intended scope of the Contract as previously modified.

10-25 FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS. The Federal Specifications and Standards, and supplements, amendments and indices thereto are prepared and issued by the General Services Administration of the Federal Government. They may be obtained from the Specifications Activity, Printed Materials Supply Division, Building 197, Naval Weapons Plant, Washington D.C. 20407.

10-26 FORCE ACCOUNT. The term used to describe a method of accounting which may be employed as a basis of payment to the Contractor for Extra Work.

10-27 INSPECTOR. An authorized representative of the Engineer assigned to make all necessary reviews of the work performed or being performed, or of the materials furnished or being furnished by the Contractor.

10-28 INTENTION OF TERMS. Whenever, in these specifications or on the plans, the words “directed”, “required”, “permitted”, “ordered”, “designated”, “prescribed”, or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation, or prescription of the Engineer is intended; and similarly, the words “approved”, “acceptable” “satisfactory”, or words of like import, shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to the Engineer, subject to each case to the final determination of the OWNER.

Any reference to a specific requirement of a numbered paragraph of the Contract specifications or a cited standard shall be interpreted to include all general requirements of the entire section, specification item, or cited standard that may be pertinent to such specific reference.

10-29 LABORATORY. The official testing laboratories of the OWNER or such other laboratories as may be designated by the Engineer.

Page 30: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐3 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

10-30 MAJOR AND MINOR CONTRACT ITEMS. A major Contract item shall be any item that is listed in the Bid, the total cost of which is equal to or greater than 10 percent of the total amount of the awarded Contract. All other items shall be considered minor Contract items.

10-31 MATERIALS. Any substance specified for use in the construction of the Contract work.

10-32 NOTICE TO PROCEED. A written notice to the Contractor to begin the actual work on a previously agreed to date. If applicable, the Notice to Proceed shall state the date on which the Contract time begins.

10-33 OWNER. The term OWNER shall mean the State of Alabama acting by and through the Alabama State Port Authority.

10-34 PAYMENT BOND. The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his surety as a guaranty that he will pay in full all bills and accounts for materials and labor used in the construction of the work.

10-35 PERFORMANCE BOND. The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his surety as a guaranty that the Contractor will complete the work in accordance with the terms of the Contract.

10-36 PLANS. The official Drawings or exact reproductions, approved by the Engineer, which show the location, character, dimensions and details of the work to be done and which are to be considered as a part of the Contract, supplementary to the specifications.

10-37 PROJECT. The agreed scope of work for accomplishing specific development.

10-38 BID (PROPOSAL). The written offer of the Bidder (when submitted on the approved Bid form) to perform the contemplated work and furnish the necessary materials in accordance with the provisions of the Plans and Specifications.

10-39 BID FORM. The approved, prepared form on which the OWNER requires that formal bids be submitted for the work contemplated.

10-40 BID GUARANTY. The security furnished with a Bid to guarantee that the bidder will enter into a Contract if his Bid is accepted by the OWNER.

10-41 SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Specific directions and provisions additional to these GENERAL PROVISIONS and to any CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS setting forth conditions or requirements of construction which are not satisfactorily covered by these GENERAL PROVISIONS or the CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS. SPECIAL PROVISIONS shall prevail over the GENERAL PROVISIONS and CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS because they set forth the final Contractual intent as to the matter involved.

10-42 SPECIFICATIONS. A part of the Contract containing the written directions and requirements for completing the Contract work. Standards for specifying materials or testing which are cited in the Contract specifications by reference shall have the same force and effect as if included in the Contract physically.

10-43 STATE. The State of Alabama, the Party of the First Part to the Contract, acting by and through the Alabama State Port Authority.

10-44 STRUCTURES. Port facilities such as wharves, piers, dolphins, bridges, culverts, catch basins, inlets, retaining walls, cribbing, storm and sanitary sewer lines, water lines, under drains, electrical ducts, manholes, handholes, lighting fixtures and bases, transformers, flexible and rigid pavements, buildings, vaults, and other man-made features of the port that may be encountered in the work and not otherwise classified herein.

Page 31: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐4 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

10-45 SUBCONTRACTOR. Any properly qualified individual undertaking the performance of any part of the work under the terms of the Contract, by virtue of an agreement between himself and the Contractor, with the approval of the OWNER.

10-46 SUBGRADE. The soil which forms the pavement foundation.

10-47 SUPERINTENDENT. The Contractor's executive representative who is present on the work site during progress, authorized to receive and fulfill instructions from the Engineer, and who shall supervise and direct the construction.

10-48 SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT. A written agreement between the Contractor and the OWNER covering: (1) work that would increase or decrease the total amount of the awarded Contract by not more than 10 percent; or any major Contract item, by more than 25 percent, such increased or decreased work being within the scope of the originally awarded Contract, or (2) work that is not within the scope of the originally awarded Contract.

10-49 SURETY. The corporate body, licensed under the laws of Alabama, bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance of the Contract and also for the payment of all claims recoverable under the Contract Bonds.

10-50 WORK. The furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary or convenient to the Contractor's performance of all duties and obligations imposed by the Contract, plans and specifications.

10-51 WORKING DAY. A working day shall be any day other than a national legal holiday, Saturday, or Sunday, on which the normal working forces of the Contractor may proceed with regular work for at least 6 hours toward completion of the Contract. Unless work is suspended for causes beyond the Contractor's control, Saturdays, Sundays and national holidays on which the Contractor's forces engage in regular work, requiring the presence of an inspector, will be considered as working days.

Page 32: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐5 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 20 BID REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS 20-01 PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

Bid forms will be issued only to prospective Bidders who are licensed under the terms of the existing State laws. If the applicant is a corporation organized in a state other than Alabama, it shall furnish a certificate from the Secretary of State showing that it is qualified to transact business in Alabama.

20-02 CONTENTS OF BID FORMS

The OWNER shall furnish bidders with Bid forms. All papers bound with or attached to the Bid forms are necessary parts and must not be detached. The plans, specifications, and other documents designated in the Bid form shall be considered a part of the Bid whether attached or not.

20-03 ISSUANCE OF BID FORMS

The OWNER reserves the right to refuse to issue a Bid form to a prospective bidder should such bidder be in default for any of the following reasons:

(a) Failure to pay, or satisfactorily settle, all bills due for labor and materials on former Contracts in force with the OWNER.

(b) Contractor default under previous Contracts with the OWNER.

(c) Bid withdrawal or Bid Bond forfeiture on previous project with the OWNER.

(d) Unsatisfactory work on previous Contract with the OWNER.

(e) Performance failure of manufacturer’s product or materials.

20-04 INTERPRETATION OF ESTIMATED BID QUANTITIES

An estimate of quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under these specifications is given in the Bid. It is the result of careful calculations and is believed to be correct. It is given only as a basis for comparison of Bids and the award of the Contract. The OWNER does not expressly, or by implication, agree that the actual quantities involved will correspond exactly therewith; nor shall the bidder plead misunderstanding or deception because of such estimates of quantities, or of the character, location or other conditions pertaining to the work. Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in accordance with the plans and specifications. It is understood that the quantities may be increased or decreased as hereinafter provided in the subsection titled 50-02 ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES of Division IV, without in any way invalidating the unit bid prices.

20-05 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE

The bidder is expected to carefully examine the site of the proposed work, the Bid, plans, specifications, and Contract forms. He shall satisfy himself as to the character, quality, and quantities of work to be performed, materials to be furnished, and as to the requirements of the proposed Contract. The submission of a Bid shall be prima facie evidence that the bidder has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work and as to the requirements of the proposed Contract, plans, and specifications.

Boring logs and other records of subsurface investigations and tests are available for inspection of bidders. It is understood and agreed that such subsurface information, whether included in the plans, specifications, or otherwise made available to the bidder, was obtained and is intended for the OWNER's design and estimating purposes only. Such information has been made available for the convenience of all bidders. It is further understood and agreed that each

Page 33: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐6 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

bidder is solely responsible for all assumptions, deductions, or conclusions which he may make or obtain from his examination of the boring logs and other records of subsurface investigations and tests that are furnished by the OWNER.

20-06 PREPARATION OF BID

The bidder shall submit his Bid on the forms furnished by the OWNER. All blank spaces in the Bid forms must be correctly filled in where indicated for each and every item for which a quantity is given. The bidder shall state the price (written in ink or typed) both in words and numerals for which he proposed to do each pay item furnished in the Bid. The Department will check the gross sum given in the Bid and in case of error or discrepancy, the gross sum obtained by adding the products of the unit prices and the various estimated quantities listed in the Bid shall prevail and this shall be the Contract Bid Price. In case of conflict between words and numerals, the words, unless obviously incorrect, shall govern.

The bidder shall sign his Bid correctly and in ink. If the Bid is made by an individual, his name and post office address must be shown. If made by a partnership, the name and post office address of each member of the partnership must be shown. If made by a corporation the person signing the Bid shall give the name of the State under the laws of which the corporation was chartered and the name, titles, and business address of the president, secretary, and the treasurer. Anyone signing a Bid as an agent shall file evidence of his authority to do so and that the signature is binding upon the firm or corporation.

20-07 IRREGULAR BIDS

Bids shall be considered irregular for the following reasons:

(a) If the Bid is on a form other than that furnished by the OWNER, if the OWNER's form is altered, or if any part of the Bid form is detached.

(b) If there are unauthorized additions, conditional or alternate pay items, or irregularities of any kind which make the Bid incomplete, indefinite, or otherwise ambiguous.

(c) If the Bid does not contain a unit price for each pay item listed in the Bid, except in the case of authorized alternate pay items, for which the bidder is not required to furnish a unit price.

(d) If the Bid contains unit prices that are obviously unbalanced.

(e) If the Bid is not accompanied by the bid bond specified by the OWNER.

The OWNER reserves the right to reject any irregular Bid and the right to waive technicalities if such waiver is in the best interest of the OWNER and conforms to laws and ordinances pertaining to the letting of construction Contracts.

20-08 BID GUARANTY

Each separate Bid shall be accompanied by a certified check, or other specified acceptable collateral, in the amount of 5% of the bid price, but not more than $10,000. Such check, or collateral, shall be made payable to the Alabama State Port Authority.

20-09 DELIVERY OF BID

Each Bid submitted shall be placed in a sealed envelope plainly marked on the outside with the project description, Bidder's name and address, Contractor's License number, Contractor's Classification of License, and the time and date of bid opening. When sent by mail, preferably registered, the sealed Bid, marked as indicated above, should be enclosed in an additional envelope. No Bid will be considered unless received at the place specified in the advertisement before the time specified for opening all bids.

Bids received after the bid opening time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.

Page 34: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐7 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

20-10 WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF BIDS

A bidder may withdraw or revise (by withdrawal of one Bid and submission of another) a Bid provided that the bidder's request for withdrawal is received by the OWNER in writing or by telegram before the time specified for opening bids. Revised Bids must be received at the place specified in the advertisement before the time specified for opening all bids.

20-11 PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS

Bids shall be opened, and read, publicly at the time and place specified in the advertisement. Bidders, their authorized agents, and other interested persons are invited to attend.

Bids that have been withdrawn (by written or telegraphic request) or received after the time specified for opening bids shall be returned to the bidder unopened.

20-12 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

A bidder shall be considered disqualified for any of the following reasons:

(a) Submitting more than one Bid from the same partnership, firm or corporation under the same or different name.

(b) Evidence of collusion among bidders. Bidders participating in such collusion shall be disqualified as bidders for any future work of the OWNER.

(c) If the bidder is considered to be in “default” for any reason specified in the paragraph titled ISSUANCE OF BID FORMS of this subsection.

(d) If the bidder has not complied with the provisions of the Laws of the State of Alabama concerning licensing of Contractors.

(e) If an out-of-state bidder has not qualified with the Secretary of State to do business in Alabama.

20-13 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Time is an essential element in the Contract. As the prosecution of the Work will inconvenience the public, obstruct traffic, and interfere with business, it is important that the work be pressed vigorously to completion. Also, the cost to the Department of the administration of the Contract, supervision, inspection, engineering, and in some cases maintenance of detours around or over the work under construction will be increased or decreased as the time occupied in the Work is lengthened or shortened. Therefore, exclusive of Sundays, national holidays, and other exceptions and extensions as detailed elsewhere in these Specifications for each day that the Work remains incomplete after the time specified in the Contract, or additional time that may be allowed by the Engineer for the completion of the work when extra or additional work is ordered by the Engineer, the amount specified in the following schedule shall be paid by the Contractor to the Department as liquidated damages for the loss sustained by the State because of failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the specified time.

Page 35: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐8 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SCHEDULE OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Contract Bid Price Amount of Liquidated Damages per Day

$100,000 and less $ 100.00

More than $100,000 and less than $250,000 150.00

$250,000 and less than $600,000 200.00

$600,000 or more 0.033% of Contract amount

20-14 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIALS

20-14.1 In accordance with the State of Alabama Statutes for Sales Tax Exemptions for a State Agency, it is the intent of this Contract for the Alabama State Port Authority (Owner) to reduce sales tax.

20-14.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to purchase all of the required materials or equipment to be used on this project which will become part of the realty.

20-14.1.2 The cost of the Materials and Equipment which will become part of the realty is to be included in the Bid Price. Sales taxes, which will become part of the realty in accordance with the Alabama Statutes, are not to be included.

20-14.1.3 In order to achieve sales tax exemption and avoid jeopardizing immunity from sales taxes it is essential that the following procedures be followed.

20-14.2 Purchase of Materials or Equipment 20-14.2.1 All purchase orders must be executed on the Owner's Purchase Order Letterhead/Form.

20-14.2.2 The purchase order form format is to be designed at the Owner's discretion with the Owner reserving approval rights concerning terms and conditions boilerplate.

20-14.2.3 The Contractor's organization will be designated as an agent of the Owner for Material and Equipment purchases and will provide the names of two individuals in the Organization who will be authorized to purchase on the behalf of the Owner.

20-14.2.4 Purchase Orders are to be numerically sequenced with two executed copies furnished to the Construction Manager, one copy of which will be forwarded to the Owner by the Construction Manager. If a Construction Manager is not assigned to the project, the copies should go directly to the Owner’s Project Manager within the Engineering Services Division.

20-14.2.5 Owner Purchase Orders are invalid for gross amounts less than $2,000.00. Any materials purchased directly by the Contractor for the project shall be subject to Sales Tax and paid by the Contractor.

20-14.3 Payment of Materials or Equipment 20-14.3.1 All payments in connection with the purchase orders generated by Owner's Contractor/Agent will be in the form of a check from the Alabama State Port Authority to the appropriate vendors or suppliers.

20-14.3.2 Check Request Form will be furnished to the Contractor by the Owner. The Check Request Form will be numerically sequenced and accounted for.

Page 36: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐9 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

20-14.3.3 The Contractor is responsible for preparing the Check Request Form for the Owner's signature.

20-14.3.4 An Invoice Transmittal Form is to be designed by the Contractor with the Owner reserving the right of approval of the Invoice Transmittal Form design. It is a primary requirement that the Invoice Transmittal Form indicate that the Owner is the sole payer for materials or equipment. The Invoice Transmittal Form will be numerically sequenced and accounted for.

20-14.3.5 All Contractor requests for payment for materials and equipment purchased under the provisions of this Article will be forwarded to the Construction Manager under cover of the Invoice Transmittal Form, submitted in duplicate, with one copy retained by the Construction Manager and one copy retained by the Owner. The Invoice Transmittal shall be backed-up with signed receiving or delivery tickets, invoices and prepared Check Request Form plus one (1) additional copy of the Check Request Form which will be kept by the Construction Manager.

20-14.3.6 Upon signature by the Owner of the Check Request Form, a check from the Alabama State Port Authority will be issued directly to the vendor or supplier.

20-14.4 Accounting Procedures 20-14.4.1 The Contractor's Schedule of Values shall be broken down into three categories, if requested by Owner, showing Material, Equipment and with the remaining category containing labor, fee, rentals, overhead and other costs on a line item basis.

20-14.4.2 Check Request Forms generated by the Contractor/Agent for the Owner shall be collated on a monthly basis and assembled into a credit amount showing amounts to be deducted from the current Payment Application and Contract Sum.

20-14.4.3 The Contractor's Payment Application will be adjusted on a monthly basis in accordance with the preceding monthly accumulated credit amounts for Owner purchases.

20-14.4.4 Discounts which accrue from Owner payments for prompt payment will accrue as 50% to the Owner and 50% to the Contractor.

20-14.4.5 Retainage will not be withheld on Owner purchased Materials or Equipment.

20-14.5 Procedures The Contractor shall follow the procedures set forth below, but nothing herein shall be

construed to reduce, limit or change the Contractor's overall responsibility for the quality, scheduling, coordination, warranty, overhead, profit or retainage, except as provided in subparagraph 20-14.4.5 of the complete Contract scope of work in accordance with all provisions of the Contract Documents.

20-14.5.1 Procurement of Material Selected by Contractor.

With respect to any materials, equipment or product to be purchased by the Owner, the following procedures shall be followed:

.1 Immediately upon notice to proceed or award of Contract, the Contractor in conjunction with the Construction Manger shall develop a list of items to be purchased by the Owner for incorporation into the work.

.2 When the type, quantity, and price of each lot of materials, equipment or product to be purchased on a single purchase order have been determined by the Contractor, Contractor shall complete the Owner Purchase Order

Page 37: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐10 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

Form and shall sign the form to certify that the material, equipment or product described on the form complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner Purchase Order Form, signed by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the vendor by the Contractor. The total monetary value listed on the Purchase Order Form is the cost limitation established for the Purchase Order.

.3 Simultaneously, with the Contractor/Agent's issuance of a purchase order form for major items the Contractor shall then incorporate into his expediting schedule his activities showing purchase time, shop drawing time, submittal approval time, integrated into the updated project schedule and then tied into the activity requiring the purchase material.

.4 The supplier shall deliver the material, equipment or product to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the purchase order, and as required by the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the materials the Contractor shall inspect the materials, equipment or product as necessary to verify conformity of the material, equipment or product received with the Owner Purchase Order and with the shipping documents. The Contractor shall provide to the Vendor written certification of receipt, or signed delivery ticket, of Each delivery of material, equipment or product which certification shall fully describe any shortages, defects, damage or non-compliance to the supplier within five days or receipt of Each delivery and shall arrange for the return and replacement of defective, damaged or non-conforming material, equipment or product on behalf of the Owner, in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.

.5 The supplier shall submit each invoice along with aforementioned proof of delivery for material, equipment or product procured pursuant to the provisions hereof to the Owner in care of the Contractor/Consignee. The Contractor/Consignee shall verify and certify to the Owner the accuracy and completeness of each invoice submitted by the supplier. Each certified invoice shall be submitted with appropriate Check Request Form no later than the Contractor's next monthly Application for Payment to the Owner.

.6 After the Contractor's Application for Payment, along with Check Request Forms including certified supplier invoices and delivery tickets, has been approved for payment in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions, the Owner shall make direct payments to the supplier, and the amount of each such payment, shall be deducted from the then-unpaid balance of the Contractor's Contract Sum. The amount deducted shall be in accordance with subparagraph 20-14.4.2.

20-14.5.2 Owner-Purchased Materials

Materials used on the Project which are purchased by the Owner will be available at the location specified in the Purchase Order and in accordance with the periodically adjusted project schedule. The Contractor shall review the updated and adjusted Project Schedule and will be responsible for coordinating the deliveries with the progress of the work. The Contractor's costs for storing, transporting, handling, protecting and installing Owner purchased material shall be included in the Contract Sum and paid for when such material is installed. The Contractor shall be responsible for material furnished to it, and shall pay for storage charges incurred as a result of its failure to take delivery of Owner material on the assigned date.

Page 38: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐11 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the cost of replacing or repairing material lost or damaged from any cause whatsoever after receipt by the Contractor or after the Contractor has failed to take delivery after the assigned date. The costs will be deducted from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor, except those amounts covered under any claims payments made under insurance policies furnished by the Owner. In cases where lost or damaged material was not evident at the time such materials were received by the Contractor, the Contractor will be afforded the same protection by the Owner as the Owner has received from the original shipper and manufacturer. The Owner, in addition, agrees to provide the Contractor with all necessary assistance in communicating with the manufacturer of any materials which fail to function properly once installed.

The Contractor is responsible for providing and performance of warranty work in connection with the Owner purchased materials, for the time periods as required by the Contract Documents.

20-14.6 Materials and Equipment Responsibility 20-14.6.1 The General Contractor shall retain as part of his Bid and Fee the following responsibilities for care, custody and control of the Owner purchased Materials and Equipment.

1. Insure that all Materials and Equipment purchased by the Owner are in complete accordance with the Plans and Specifications.

2. Shop drawings and submittals.

3. Scheduling.

4. Shipment, receipt, unloading, inspection, storage and handling.

5. Return of damaged Materials and Equipment.

6. Filing of freight claims.

7. Installation as required.

8. Startup and testing as required per specifications.

9. Warranty and maintenance as required per specifications.

10. Training as required per specifications.

11. Spare parts. Special tools and additional stock as required by the Specifications.

12. In the event the Contractor orders non specified, wrong size or dimensioned Material or Equipment it will be his responsibility to replace such at no cost to the Owner.

20-14.7 Project Close-Out The Contractor shall return to the Owner all blank Purchase Order Forms issued, but not used on the project.

Page 39: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐12 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 30 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

30-01 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

After the Bids are publicly opened and read, they will be compared on the basis of the summation of the products obtained by multiplying the estimated quantities shown in the Bid by the unit bid prices. If a bidder's Bid contains a discrepancy between unit bid prices written in words and unit bid prices written in numbers, the unit price written in words shall govern.

Until the award of the Contract is made, the OWNER reserves the right to reject a bidder's Bid for any of the following reasons:

a) If the Bid is irregular as specified in the subsection titled IRREGULAR BIDS of Subsection 20.

b) If the bidder is disqualified for any of the reasons specified in the subsection titled DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS of Subsection 20.

In addition, until the award of a Contract is made, the OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids; waive technicalities, if such waiver is in the best interest of the OWNER and is in conformance with applicable laws or regulations pertaining to the letting of construction Contracts; advertise for new Bids; or proceed with the work otherwise. All such actions shall promote the OWNER's best interests.

30-02 AWARD OF CONTRACT

The award of a Contract, if it is to be awarded, shall be made within 60 calendar days of the date specified for publicly opening Bids.

Award of the Contract shall be made by the OWNER to the lowest qualified bidder whose Bid conforms to the cited requirements of the OWNER.

30-03 CANCELLATION OF AWARD

The OWNER reserves the right to cancel the award without liability to the bidder, except return of Bid guaranty, at any time before a Contract has been fully executed by all parties and is approved by the OWNER in accordance with the paragraph titled APPROVAL OF CONTRACT of this subsection.

30-04 RETURN OF BID GUARANTY

All Bid guaranties, except those of the three lowest bidders, will be returned immediately after the OWNER has made a comparison of bids as hereinbefore specified in the paragraph titled CONSIDERATION OF BIDS of this subsection. Bid guaranties of the two lowest bidders will be retained by the OWNER until such time as an award is made, at which time, the unsuccessful bidders' Bid guaranty will be returned. The successful bidder's Bid guaranty will be returned as soon as the OWNER receives the contract bonds as specified in the paragraph titled “REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT BONDS” of the subsection.

30-05 REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT BONDS

In order to insure the faithful performance of each and every condition, stipulation, and requirement of the Contract and to indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from any and all damages, either directly or indirectly, (arising out of any failure to perform same), the successful Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall, within ten (10) days from the date of award, furnish at his expense and file with the OWNER an acceptable Surety Bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Bid Price of the Contract as awarded. Said Bond shall be made on the approved bond form, shall be furnished by a reputable surety

Page 40: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐13 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

company authorized to do business in the State of Alabama, shall be counter-signed by an authorized agent resident in the State who is qualified for the execution of such instruments, and shall be attached thereto power of attorney of the signing agent.

In case of default on the part of the Contractor, all expenses incident to ascertaining and collecting losses suffered by the OWNER under the Bond, including both Engineering and legal services, shall lie against the Contract Bond for Performance of the Work.

In addition thereto, the successful Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall, within ten (10) days, furnish at his expense and file with the OWNER an acceptable Surety Bond for Payment of Labor, Materials, and Supplies payable to the OWNER in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price with the obligation that the Contractor shall promptly make payment to all persons furnishing him or them with labor, materials, foodstuffs, or supplies for, or in, prosecution of the work including the payment of reasonable attorney's fees, incurred by successful claimants or plaintiffs in suits on said bond.

No surety bonds from any insurance company or bonding company which has a lower rating, in the Best Key Rating Guide, than A will be accepted.

30-06 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

The successful bidder shall sign (execute) the necessary agreements for entering into the Contract and return such signed Contract to the OWNER, along with the fully executed surety bond or bonds specified in the paragraph titled REQUIREMENT OF CONTRACT BONDS of this subsection, within 10 calendar days from the date mailed or otherwise delivered to the successful bidder.

30-07 APPROVAL OF CONTRACT

Upon receipt of the Contract and Contract bond or bonds that have been executed by the successful bidder, the OWNER shall complete the execution of the Contract and return the fully executed Contract to the Contractor. Delivery of the fully executed Contract to the Contractor shall constitute the OWNER's approval to be bound by the successful bidder's Bid and the terms of the Contract.

30-08 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT

Failure of the successful bidder to execute the Contract and furnish an acceptable surety bond or bonds within the 10 calendar day period specified in the paragraph titled “REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT BONDS” of this subsection shall be just cause for cancellation of the award and forfeiture of the Bid guaranty, not as a penalty, but as liquidation of damages to the OWNER. Award may then be made to the next lowest qualified Bidder or the work may be re-advertised, or otherwise contracted as the Director may decide.

Page 41: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐14 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 40 INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

40-01 INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall assume all liability for and shall indemnify and save harmless the State of Alabama, the Alabama State Port Authority and its officers and employees, and Engineer from all damages and liability for injury to any person or persons, and injury to or destruction of property, including the loss of use thereof, by reason of an accident or occurrence arising from operations under the Contract, whether such operations are performed by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, occurring on or about the premises, or the ways and means adjacent, during the term of the Contract, or any extension thereof, and shall also assume the liability for injury and/or damages to adjacent or neighboring property by reason of work done under the Contract.

40-02 CONTRACTOR COVERAGE The Contractor shall not commence work under the Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under the following paragraphs and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar applicable insurance required of the subcontractor has been obtained and approved. If the subcontractor does not take out insurance in his own name, then the principal Contractor shall provide such insurance protection for subcontractor and his employees by endorsement to the Contractor’s policies or by taking out separate policies in the name of the subcontractor.

40-03 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Contract Commercial General Liability insurance, including Blanket Contractual and Completed Operations coverage, in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for any one occurrence for bodily injury, including death, and property damage liability. Policy shall include endorsement identifying the Owner and Engineer as Primary and Non-contributory Additional Insureds as respects the Contractor’s work for the Owner, to the extent required by written Contract, including a waiver of all rights of subrogation.

40-04 OWNER’S AND CONTRACTOR’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Contract a separate Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability policy in the names of the Owner and Engineer in an amount not less than $2,000,000. Policy shall be delivered to the Owner.

40-05 BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Contract Business Automobile Liability insurance covering owned, non-owned and hired vehicles in an amount not less than $1,000,000 for any one occurrence for bodily injury, including death, and property damage liability. The Owner and Engineer shall be identified as Additional Insureds, to the extent required by written Contract.

40-06 WORKERS COMPENSATION The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Contract Workers Compensation and Employers Liability insurance providing coverage under the Alabama Workers Compensation Act in an amount not less than that required by Alabama Law.

Where applicable, Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Contract insurance providing coverage as required by Federal statute, including but not limited to U.S. Longshoremen and Harbor Workers Act (USL&H), Jones Act, and Railroad Federal Employers Liability Act (FELA).

Page 42: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐15 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

40-07 OCEAN MARINE COVERAGE In the event work involves the use of watercraft in the completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide Protection and Indemnity coverage, including crew, in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for each loss.

Only the Contractor and/or Subcontractor using watercraft in the completion of its work shall be required to provide evidence of this coverage. In the event the Contractor subcontracts for this portion of the work, the Contractor shall not allow the subcontractor to commence work until such coverage has first been obtained by the subcontractor and approved by the Owner.

40-08 RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY In any case where the Contract involves work within 50 feet of an operating railroad track, the Contractor shall provide a Railroad Protective Liability policy in the name of the railroad whose right of way is involved. The limits of the policy shall be not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence with $6,000,000 aggregate.

NOTE #1: With the written approval of the Owner, in lieu of the Railroad Protective Liability policy, the Contractor may cause to be attached to its Commercial General Liability policy standard ISO endorsement, “Contractual Liability – Railroads” (CG 24 17). The railroad must be identified as an Additional Insured.

NOTE #2: Only the Contractor and/or Subcontractor performing the work within 50 feet of the railroad track shall be required to provide evidence of this coverage. In the event the Contractor subcontracts for this portion of the work, the Contractor shall not allow the subcontractor to commence work until such coverage has first been obtained by the subcontractor and approved by the Owner.

40-09 BUILDER’S RISK or INSTALLATION FLOATER The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Contract Builder’s Risk insurance or Installation Floater, written on an “All Risk” basis, insuring the work included in the Contract against all physical loss. The amount of insurance shall at all times be at least equal to the amount of the Contract. The policy shall be in the names of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and “all Subcontractors,” as their interests appear. Policy shall be provided to the Owner prior to commencement of work.

When changes in scope of work by written Change Order or aggregate Change Orders equal 15 percent of the total Contract, the amount of coverage provided in the Builder’s Risk/Installation Floater policy shall be increased accordingly and evidence of increased coverage delivered to the Owner.

40-10 PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, in triplicate, Certificates of Insurance, signed by the licensed agent, evidencing the required coverage, along with letter of transmittal giving date of delivery. A copy of this letter shall also be delivered to the Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to require certified copies of any and all policies.

All coverage and bonds shall be provided by companies acceptable to the Owner. Each policy of insurance shall provide, either in body of the policy or by endorsement, that such policy cannot be substantially altered or cancelled without thirty (30) days’ written notice to the Owner and insured.

(Rev. 1/26/06)

Page 43: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐16 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 50 SCOPE OF WORK

50-01 INTENT OF CONTRACT The intent of the Contract is to provide for construction and completion, in every detail, of the work described. It is further intended that the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and supplies required to complete the work in accordance with the plans, drawings, specifications, and terms of the Contract.

50-02 ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES

The OWNER reserves and shall have the right to make such alterations in the work as may be necessary or desirable to complete the work originally intended in an acceptable manner. Unless otherwise specified herein, the Engineer shall be and is hereby authorized to make such alterations in the work as may increase or decrease the originally awarded Contract quantities, provided that the aggregate of such alterations does not change the total Contract cost by more than 10% or the total cost of any major Contract item by more than 25 percent (total cost being based on the unit prices and estimated quantities in the awarded Contract). Alterations which do not exceed the 25 percent limitation shall not invalidate the Contract nor release the surety, and the Contractor agrees to accept payment for such alteration as if the altered work had been a part of the original Contract. These alterations, which are for work within the general scope of the Contract shall be covered by “Change Orders” issued by the Engineer. Change orders for altered work shall include extensions of Contract time where, in the Engineer's opinion, such extensions are commensurate with the amount and difficulty of added work.

Should the aggregate amount of altered work exceed the 25 percent limitation hereinbefore specified, such excess altered work shall be covered by supplemental agreement. If the OWNER and the Contractor are unable to agree on a unit adjustment for any Contract item that requires a supplemental agreement, the OWNER reserves the right to terminate the Contract with respect to the item and make other arrangement for its completion.

All supplemental agreements shall require consent of the Contractor's surety and separate performance and payment bonds.

50-03 OMITTED ITEMS

The Engineer may, in the OWNER's best interest, omit from the work any Contract item, except major Contract items. Major Contract items may be omitted by a supplemental agreement. Such omission of Contract items shall not invalidate any other Contract provision or requirement.

Should a Contract item be omitted or otherwise ordered to be non-performed, the Contractor shall be paid for all work performed toward completion of such item prior to the date of the order to omit such item. Payment for work performed shall be in accordance with the paragraph titled PAYMENT FOR OMITTED ITEMS of Subsection 100.

50-04 EXTRA WORK

Should acceptable completion of the Contract require the Contractor to perform an item of work for which no basis of payment has been provided in the original Contract or previously issued change orders or supplemental agreements, the same shall be called Extra Work. Extra work that is within the general scope of the Contract shall contain agreed unit prices for performing the change order work in accordance with the requirements specified in the order, and shall contain any adjustment to the Contract time that, in the Engineer's opinion, is necessary for completion of such extra work.

Page 44: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐17 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

When determined by the Engineer to be in the OWNER's best interest, he may order the Contractor to proceed with extra work by force account as provided in the paragraph titled PAYMENT FOR EXTRA AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK of Subsection 100.

Extra work that is necessary for acceptable completion of the project, but is not within the general scope of the work covered by the original Contract shall be covered by a Supplemental Agreement as hereinbefore defined in the paragraph titled SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT of Subsection 10.

Any claim for payment of extra work that is not covered by written agreement (change order or supplemental agreement) shall be rejected by the OWNER.

50-05 MAINTENANCE OF COMMERCE

It is the explicit intention of the Contract that the safety of workers and vessels, as well as the Contractor's equipment and personnel, is the most important consideration.

It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall provide for the free and unobstructed movement of vessels in the waterfront areas of the port with respect to his own operations and the operations of all his Subcontractors as specified in the paragraph titled LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS of Subsection 90.

With respect to his own operations and the operations of all his Subcontractors, the Contractor shall provide marking, lighting, and other acceptable means of identifying: personnel; equipment; vehicles; storage areas; and any work area or condition that may be hazardous to the operation of fire rescue equipment, or maintenance vehicles at the port.

When the Contract requires the maintenance of vehicular traffic on an existing road, street, or highway during the Contractor's performance of work that is otherwise provided for in the Contract, plans, and specifications, the Contractor shall keep such road, street, or highway open to all traffic and shall provide such maintenance as may be required to accommodate traffic. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain barricades, warning signs, flagmen, and other traffic control devices in reasonable conformity with the manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highway (published by the United States Government Printing Office), unless otherwise specified herein. The Contractor shall also construct and maintain in a safe condition any temporary connections necessary for ingress to and egress from abutting property or intersecting roads, streets or highways.

The Contractor shall make his own estimate of all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for providing the maintenance of commerce and vehicular traffic as specified in this subsection.

The cost of maintaining the commerce and vehicular traffic specified in this subsection shall not be measured or paid for directly, but shall be included in the various Contract items.

50-06 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

NOT APPLICABLE

50-07 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND IN THE WORK

NOT APPLICABLE

50-08 FINAL CLEANING UP

Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall remove from the site all machinery, equipment, surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, temporary structures, and stumps or portions of trees. He shall cut all brush and woods within the limits indicated and shall leave the site in a neat and presentable

Page 45: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐18 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

condition. Material cleared from the site and deposited on adjacent property will not be considered as having been disposed of satisfactorily, unless the Contractor has obtained the written permission of such property OWNER.

Page 46: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐19 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 60 CONTROL OF WORK

60-01 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER

The Engineer shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, and as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of the work. He shall decide all questions which may arise as to the interpretation of the specifications or plans relating to the work, the fulfillment of the Contract on the part of the Contractor, and the rights of different Contractors on the project. The Engineer shall determine the amount and quality of the several kinds of work performed and materials furnished which are to be paid for under the Contract.

60-02 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

All work and all materials furnished shall be in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, grading sections, cross sections, dimensions, material requirements, and testing requirements that are specified (including specified tolerances) in the Contract, plans, or specifications.

If the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product not within reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications but that the portion of the work affected will, in his opinion, result in a finished product having a level of economy, durability, and workmanship acceptable to the OWNER, he will advise the OWNER of his determination that the affected work be accepted and remain in place.

In this event, the Engineer will document his determination and recommend to the OWNER a basis of acceptance which will provide for an adjustment in the Contract price for the affected portion of the work. The Engineer's determination and recommended Contract price adjustments will be based on good Engineering judgment and such tests or retests of the affected work as are, in his opinion, needed. Changes in the Contract price shall be covered by Contract modifications (change order or supplemental agreement) as applicable.

If the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product are not in reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications and have resulted in an unacceptable finished product, the affected work or materials shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by any at the expense of the Contractor in accordance with the Engineer's written orders.

For the purpose of this subsection, the term “reasonably close conformity” shall not be construed as waiving the Contractor's responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the Contract, plans and specifications. The term shall not be construed as waiving the Engineer's right to insist on strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications during the Contractor's prosecution of the work, when, in the Engineer's opinion, such compliance is essential to provide an acceptable finished portion of the work.

For the purpose of this subsection, the term “reasonably close conformity” is also intended to provide the Engineer with the authority to use good Engineering judgment in his determinations as to acceptance of work that is not in strict conformity but will provide a finished product equal to or better than that intended by the requirements of the Contract, plans and specifications.

60-03 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Contract, plans, specifications, and all referenced standards cited are essential parts of the Contract requirements. A requirement occurring in one is as binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to be complementary and to describe and provide for a complete work. In case of discrepancy, calculated dimensions will govern over scaled dimensions; special provisions shall govern over plans, Contract construction specifications, Contract general

Page 47: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐20 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

provisions, cited specifications, and cited testing standards; plans shall govern over Contract construction specifications, Contract general provisions, and cited testing standards; Contract construction specification shall govern over Contract general provisions, and cited testing standards; Contract general provisions shall govern over cited testing standards. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission on the plans or specifications. In the event the Contractor discovers any apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call upon the Engineer for his interpretation and decision, and such decision shall be final.

60-04 COOPERATION OF THE CONTRACTOR

The Contractor will be supplied with electronic copies each of the Plans and Specifications. He shall have Hard Copies available on the work site(s) at all times, one copy each of the Plans and Specifications.

The Contractor will give constant attention to the work to facilitate the progress thereof, and he shall cooperate with the Engineer and his Inspectors and with other Contractors in every way possible. The Engineer shall allocate the work and designate the sequence of construction in case of controversy between Contractors. The Contractor shall have a competent Superintendent on the worksite at all times who is fully authorized as his agent on the work. The Superintendent shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the Plans and Specifications and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Engineer or his authorized representative.

60-05 COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS

The OWNER reserves the right to Contract for and perform other or additional work on or near the work covered by this Contract.

When separate Contracts are let within the limits of any one project, Each Contractor shall conduct his work so as not to interfere with or hinder the progress or completion of the work being performed by other Contractors. Contractors working on the same project shall cooperate with each other as directed.

Each Contractor involved shall assume all liability, financial or otherwise, in connection with his Contract and shall protect and save harmless the OWNER from any and all damages or claims that may arise because of inconvenience, delays, or loss experienced by him because of the presence and operations or other Contractors working within the limits of the same project.

The Contractor shall arrange his work and shall place and dispose of the materials being used so as not to interfere with the operations of the other Contractors within the limits of the same project. He shall join his work with that of the others in an acceptable manner and shall perform it in proper sequence to that of the others.

60-06 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AND STAKES

NOT APPLICABLE

60-07 AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

60-08 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS

Inspectors employed by the OWNER shall be authorized to inspect work done and all materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the materials to be used. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke,

Page 48: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐21 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

alter, or waive any provision of the Contract. Inspectors are not authorized to issue instructions contrary to the plans and specifications or to act as foreman for the Contractor.

Inspectors employed by the OWNER are authorized to notify the Contractor or his representatives of any failure of the work or materials to conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, or specifications and to reject such nonconforming materials in question until such issues can be referred to the Engineer for his decision.

60-09 INSPECTION OF THE WORK

All materials and each part or detail of the work shall be subject to review by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be allowed access to all parts of the work and shall be furnished with such information and assistance by the Contractor as is required to make a complete and detailed inspection.

If the Engineer requests it, the Contractor, at any time before acceptance of the work, shall remove or uncover such portions of the finished work as may be directed.

After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the work to the standard required by the specifications. Should the work thus exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering, or removing, and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed will be paid for as extra work; but should the work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable, the uncovering, or removing, and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed will be at the Contractor's expense.

Any work done or materials used without supervision or inspection by an authorized representative of the OWNER may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense unless the OWNER's representative failed to inspect after having been given reasonable notice in writing that the work was to be performed.

60-10 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK

All work which does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications will be considered unacceptable, unless otherwise determined acceptable by the OWNER as provided in the paragraph titled CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS of this subsection.

Unacceptable work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective materials, damage through carelessness, or any other cause found to exist prior to the final acceptance of the work, shall be removed immediately and replaced in an acceptable manner in accordance with the provisions of the paragraph titled CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK of Subsection 80.

No work shall be done without lines and grades having been established by the Contractor and subsequently approved by the Engineer. Work done contrary to the instructions of the Engineer, work done beyond the lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein specified, or any extra work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed or replaced at the Contractor's expense.

Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply forthwith with any order of the Engineer made under the provisions of this subsection, the Engineer will have authority to cause unacceptable work to be remedied, or removed and replaced, and unauthorized work to be removed, and to deduct the costs (incurred by the OWNER) from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.

Page 49: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐22 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

60-11 LOAD RESTRICTIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

60-12 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

60-13 FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE WORK

NOT APPLICABLE

60-14 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE

If at any time during the prosecution of the project the Contractor substantially completes a usable unit or portion of the work, the occupancy of which will benefit the OWNER, he may request the Engineer to make Final Inspection of that unit. If the Engineer finds upon inspection that the unit has been satisfactorily completed in compliance with the Contract, he may accept it as being completed, and the Contractor may be relieved of further responsibility for that unit. Such partial acceptance and beneficial occupancy by the OWNER shall not void or alter any provision of the Contract or warranty.

60-15 FINAL CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION

Whenever the Engineer considers the work provided and contemplated by the Contract is nearing completion, or within ten (10) days after being notified by the Contractor that the work is completed, the Engineer will inspect all the work included in the Contract. If the Engineer finds that the work has not been satisfactorily completed at the time of such inspection, he shall inform the Contractor in writing as to the work to be done or the particular defects to be remedied to place the work in condition satisfactory for Final Construction Inspection. After the work has been satisfactorily completed the Engineer shall make the Final Construction Inspection.

60-16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

Upon due notice from the Contractor of presumptive completion of the entire project, the Engineer and OWNER will make an inspection. If all construction provided for and contemplated by the Contract is found to be completed in accordance with the Contract, plans and specifications, such inspection shall constitute the final inspection. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of final acceptance as of the date of the final inspection.

If, however, the inspection discloses any work, in whole or in part, as being unsatisfactory, the Engineer will give the Contractor the necessary instructions for correction of same, and the Contractor shall immediately comply with and execute such instructions. Upon correction of the work, another inspection will be made which shall constitute the final inspection, provided the work has been satisfactorily completed. In such event, the OWNER will make the Final Acceptance and notify the Contractor in writing of this acceptance as of the date of Final Inspection.

60-17 CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND DISPUTES

If for any reason the Contractor deems that additional compensation is due him for work or materials not clearly provided for in the Contract, plans, or specifications or previously authorized as extra work, he shall notify the Engineer in writing of his intention to claim such additional compensation before he begins the work on which he bases the claim. If such notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper opportunity by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as required, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive any claim for such additional compensation. Such notice by the Contractor and the fact that the

Page 50: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐23 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

OWNER has kept account of the cost of the work shall not in any way be construed as proving or substantiating the validity of the claim. When the work on which the claim for additional compensation is based has been completed, the Contractor shall, within 10 calendar days, submit his written claim to the Engineer, who will present it to the OWNER for consideration.

Nothing in this subsection shall be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's right to dispute the final payment based on differences in measurements or computations.

Page 51: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐24 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 70 CONTROL OF MATERIALS

70-01 SOURCE OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

The materials used on the work shall conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications. Unless otherwise specified, such materials that are manufactured or processed shall be new (as compared to used or reprocessed).

70-02 SAMPLES, TESTS, AND CITED SPECIFICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

70-03 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE

NOT APPLICABLE

70-04 PLANT INSPECTION

NOT APPLICABLE

70-05 ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE AND LABORATORY

NOT APPLICABLE

70-06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Materials shall be stored as to assure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials, even though approved before storage, may again be located so as to facilitate their prompt inspection. The Contractor shall coordinate the storage of all materials with the Engineer. Materials to be stored on OWNER's property shall not create an obstruction to commerce nor shall they interfere with the free and unobstructed movement of traffic. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the storage of materials and the location of the Contractor's plant and parked equipment or vehicles shall be as directed by the Engineer. Private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or lessee of such property. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and bear all expenses for the storage of materials on private property. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a copy of the property owner's permission.

All storage sites on private or owner's property shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor at his entire expense, except as otherwise agreed to (in writing) by the owner or lessee of the property.

70-07 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS

Any material or assembly that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, or specifications shall be considered unacceptable and shall be rejected. The Contractor shall remove any rejected material or assembly from the site of the work, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

No rejected material or assembly, the defects of which have been corrected by the Contractor, shall be returned to the site of the work until such time as the Engineer has approved its use in the work.

70-08 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIAL

The Contractor shall furnish all materials required to complete the work, except those specified herein (if any) to be furnished by the OWNER. OWNER furnished materials shall be made available to the Contractor at the location agreed upon.

Page 52: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐25 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

70-09 RECEIVING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall be responsible for clerical salaries, office space and equipment rental, incidentals to receiving incoming shipments and deliveries of all materials and equipment. All material which must be protected from the elements will be properly and orderly stored in shelters provided by the Contractor. All goods and materials stored out of doors will be properly and orderly supported. The Contractor will be responsible for safeguarding all such goods and materials against loss due to damage and theft.

Page 53: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐26 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 80 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO PUBLIC 80-01 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED

The Contractor shall keep fully informed of all Federal and State laws, and local ordinances, and regulations and all orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority, which in any manner affect those engaged or employed on the work, or which in any way affect the conduct of the work. He shall at all times observe and comply with all such laws, ordinances, regulations, orders, and decrees; and shall protect and indemnify the OWNER and all his officers, agents, or servants against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether by himself or his employees.

80-02 PERMITS, LICENSES, AND TAXES

The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, fees and taxes, and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work.

80-03 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES

If the Contractor is required or desires to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letters of patent or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner, or a third party, from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use 3of any such patented design, device, materials or process, or any trademark or copyright, and shall indemnify the OWNER for such costs, expenses, and damages which it may be obliged to pay by reason of an infringement, at any time during the prosecution or after the completion of the work.

80-04 RESTORATION OF SURFACES DISTURBED BY OTHERS

NOT APPLICABLE

80-05 SANITARY, HEALTH, AND SAFETY PROVISIONS

The Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat, sanitary condition such accommodations for the use of his employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of the State and Local Board of Health, or of other bodies or tribunals having jurisdiction.

Attention is directed to Federal, State, and local laws, rules and regulations concerning construction safety and health standards. The Contractor shall not require any worker to work in surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or safety.

80-06 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY

The Contractor shall control his operations and those of his Subcontractors and all suppliers, to assure the least inconvenience to the public. Under all circumstances, safety shall be the most important consideration.

The Contractor shall maintain the free and unobstructed movement of commerce and vehicular traffic with respect to his own operations and those of his Subcontractors and all suppliers in accordance with the paragraph titled MAINTENANCE OF COMMERCE of subsection 50, hereinbefore specified and shall limit such operations for the convenience and safety of the public, as specified in the paragraph titled LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS of subsection 90, hereinafter.

Page 54: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐27 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

80-07 BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, AND HAZARD MARKINGS

The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain all barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards necessary to protect the public and the work. When used during periods of darkness, such barricades, warning signs and hazard markings shall be suitably illuminated.

For vehicular and pedestrian traffic, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain barricades, warning signs, lights and other traffic control devices in reasonable conformity with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (published by the United States Government Printing Office).

The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain markings and associated lighting of open trenches, excavations, temporary stockpiles, and his parked construction equipment that may be hazardous to the operation of emergency fire rescue or maintenance vehicles.

The Contractor shall furnish and erect all barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards prior to commencing work which requires such erection and shall maintain the barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards until their dismantling is directed by the Engineer.

Open-flame type lights shall not be permitted.

80-08 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

NOT APPLICABLE

80-09 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND LANDSCAPE

The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and shall protect carefully from disturbance or damage all land monuments and property marks until the Engineer has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location and shall not move them until directed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character, during the prosecution of the work, resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in his manner or method of executing the work, or at any time due to defective work or materials, and said responsibility will not be released until the project shall have been completed and accepted.

When or where any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work or in consequence of the nonexecution thereof by the Contractor, he shall restore, at his own expense, such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuilding, or otherwise restoring as may be directed, or he shall make good such damage or injury in any acceptable manner.

80-10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS

The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Engineer and the OWNER and their officers, and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of any injuries or damage received or sustained by any person, persons, or property on account of the operations of the Contractor; or on account of or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work; or because of any act or through use of unacceptable materials in constructing the work; or because of any claims or amount recovered from any infringements of patent, trademark, or copyright; or from any claims or amount arising or recovered under the “Workman's Compensation Act” or any other law, ordinance, order or decree.

Money due the Contractor under and by virtue of his Contract as may be considered necessary by the OWNER for such purpose may be retained for the use of the OWNER or, in case no

Page 55: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐28 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

money is due, his surety may be held until such suit or suits, action or actions, claim or claims for injuries or damages as aforesaid shall have been settled and suitable evidence to that effect furnished to the OWNER, except that money due the Contractor will not be withheld when the Contractor produces satisfactory evidence that he is adequately protected by public liability and property damage insurance.

80-11 THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY CLAUSE

It is specifically agreed between the parties executing the Contract that it is not intended by any of the provisions of any part of the Contract to create the public or any member thereof a third party beneficiary or to authorize anyone not a party to the Contract to maintain a suit for personal injuries or property damage pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract.

80-12 OPENING SECTIONS OF THE WORK FOR OCCUPANCY

Should it be necessary for the Contractor to complete portions of the Contract work for the beneficial occupancy of the OWNER prior to completion of the entire Contract, such “phasing” of the work shall be coordinated and agreed upon by the Engineer and Contractor. The Contractor shall complete such portions of the work on or before the date agreed upon. The Contractor shall make his own estimate of the difficulties involved in arranging his work to permit such beneficial occupancy by the OWNER as described elsewhere in these specifications.

Upon completion of any portion of the work so described, such portion shall be accepted by the OWNER in accordance with the paragraph titled PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE of Subsection 60.

No portion of the work may be performed by the Contractor for use until ordered by the Engineer in writing.

The Contractor shall make his own estimate of the inherent difficulties involved in completing the work under the conditions herein described and shall not claim any added compensation by reason of delay or increased cost due to performing a portion of the Contract work.

80-13 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK

Until the Engineer's final written acceptance of the entire completed work excepting only those portions of the work accepted in accordance with the paragraph titled PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE of Subsection 60, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall take every precaution against injury or damage to any part due to the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the nonexecution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, store, and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof.

If the work is suspended for any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be responsible for the work and shall take such precautions necessary to prevent damage to the work.

80-14 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY SERVICE AND FACILITIES OF OTHERS

The Contractor shall cooperate with the owner of any public or private utility service, or a utility service of another government agency that may be authorized by the OWNER to construct, reconstruct or maintain such utility services or facilities during the progress of the work. In addition, the Contractor shall control his operations to prevent the unscheduled interruption of such utility services and facilities.

It is understood and agreed that the OWNER does not guarantee the accuracy or the completeness of the location information relating to existing utility services, facilities, or structures that may be shown on the plans or encountered in the work. Any inaccuracy or

Page 56: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐29 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

omission in such information shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to protect such existing features from damage or unscheduled interruption of service.

It is further understood and agreed that the Contractor shall, upon execution of the Contract, notify the owners of all utility services or other facilities of his plan of operations. Such notification shall be in writing. In addition to the general written notifications hereinbefore provided, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep such individual owners advised of changes in his plan of operations that would affect such owners.

Prior to commencing the work in the general vicinity of an existing utility service or facility, the Contractor shall again notify Each such owner of his plan or operation. If, in the Contractor's opinion, the owner's assistance is needed to locate the utility service or facility or the presence of a representative of the owner is desirable to observe the work, such advice should be included in the notification. Such notification shall be given by the most expeditious means to reach the utility owner no later than two normal business days prior to the Contractor's commencement of operations in such general vicinity. The Contractor shall furnish a written summary of the notification to the Engineer.

The Contractor's failure to give the Five Day notice hereinabove provided shall be cause for the Engineer to suspend the Contractor's operations in the general vicinity of a utility service or facility.

Where the outside limits of an underground utility service have been located and staked on the ground, the Contractor shall be required to use excavation methods acceptable to the Engineer within three (3) feet of such outside limits at such points as may be required to insure protection from damage due to the Contractor's operations.

Should the Contractor damage or interrupt the operations of a utility service or facility by accident or otherwise, he shall immediately notify the proper authority and the Engineer and shall take all reasonable measures to prevent further damage or interruption of service. The Contractor, in such events, shall cooperate with the utility service or facility owner and the Engineer continuously until such damage has been repaired and service restored to the satisfaction of the utility or facility owner.

The Contractor shall bear all costs of damage and restoration of service to any utility service or facility due to his operations whether or not due to negligence or accident. The OWNER reserves the right to deduct such costs from any monies due or which may become due the Contractor, or his surety.

80-15 FURNISHING RIGHTS-OF-WAY

The OWNER will be responsible for furnishing all right-of-ways upon which the work is to be constructed in advance of the Contractor's operations.

80-16 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS

In carrying out any of the Contract provisions or in exercising any power or authority granted to him by this Contract, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer, his authorized representatives, or any official of the OWNER either personally or as an official of the OWNER. It is understood that in such manner they act solely as agents and representatives of the OWNER.

80-17 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS

Upon completion of the work, the OWNER will expeditiously make Final Inspection and notify the Contractor of Final Acceptance. Such Final Acceptance, however, shall not preclude or stop the OWNER from correcting any measurement, estimate or certificate made before or after completion of the work, nor shall the OWNER be precluded or stopped from recovering from the

Page 57: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐30 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

Contractor or his surety, or both, such overpayment as may be sustained, or by failure on the part of the Contractor to fulfill his obligations under the Contract. A waiver on the part of the OWNER of any breach of any part of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.

The Contractor, without prejudice to the terms of the Contract, shall be liable to the OWNER for latent defects, fraud, or such gross mistakes as may amount to fraud, or as regards the OWNER's rights under any warranty or guaranty.

80-18 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. He shall take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with silt runoff, fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter.

80-19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS

Unless otherwise specified in this subsection, the Contractor is advised that the site of the work is not within any property, district, or site, and does not contain any building, structure, or object listed in the current National Register of Historic Places published by the United States Department of Interior.

Should the Contractor encounter, during his operations, any building, part of a building, structure, or object which is incongruous with its surroundings, he shall immediately cease operations in that location and notify the Engineer. The Engineer will immediately investigate the Contractor's finding and will direct the Contractor to either resume his operations or to suspend operations as directed.

Should the Engineer order suspension of the Contractor's operations in order to protect an archaeological or historical finding, or order the Contractor to perform extra work, such shall be covered by an appropriate Contract modification (change order or supplemental agreement) as provided in the paragraph titled EXTRA WORK AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK of Subsection 100. If appropriate, the Contract modification shall include an extension of Contract time in accordance with the paragraph titled DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME of Subsection 90.

Page 58: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐31 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 90 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

90-01 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT

The OWNER will not recognize any Subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall at all times when work is in progress be represented either in person, by a qualified Superintendent, or by other designated, qualified representative who is duly authorized to receive and execute orders of the Engineer.

Should the Contractor elect to assign his Contract, said assignment shall be concurred in by the surety, shall be presented for the consideration and Approval of the OWNER. In case of approval, the Contractor shall file copies of all Subcontractors with the Engineer.

90-02 NOTICE TO PROCEED

The Notice to Proceed shall state the date on which it is expected the Contractor will begin the construction and from which date Contract time will be charged. If no such date is stated in the notice to proceed, Contract time will start on the date the notice to proceed is issued. The Contractor shall begin the work to be performed under the Contract within ten (10) days of the date set by the Engineer in the written notice to proceed, but in any event the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of the time actual construction operations will begin.

90-03 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit his Progress Schedule for the Engineer's approval within 10 days after the effective day of the notice to proceed. The Contractor's Progress Schedule, when approved by the Engineer, may be used to establish major construction operations and to check on the progress of the work. The Contractor shall provide sufficient materials, equipment, and labor to guarantee the completion of the project in accordance with the plans and specifications within the time set forth in the contract.

If the Contractor falls significantly behind the submitted schedule, the Contractor shall, upon the Engineer's request, submit a Revised Schedule for completion of the work within the Contract time and modify his operations to provide such additional materials, equipment, and labor necessary to meet the revised schedule. Should the prosecution of the work be discontinued for any reason, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of resuming operations.

90-04 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS

The Contractor shall control his operations and the operations of his Subcontractors and all suppliers so as to provide for the free and unobstructed movement of commerce in those areas adjacent to the work.

90-05 CHARACTER OF WORKERS, METHODS AND EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall, at all times, employ sufficient labor and equipment for prosecuting the work to full completion in the manner and time required by the Contract, plans, and specifications.

All workers shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform properly the work assigned to them. Workers engaged in special work or skilled work shall have sufficient experience in such work and in the operation of the equipment required to perform the work satisfactorily.

Any persons employed by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor who, in the opinion of the Engineer, does not perform his work in a proper and skillful manner or is intemperate or disorderly shall, at the written request of the Engineer, be removed forthwith by the Contractor

Page 59: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐32 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

or Subcontractor employing such person, and shall not be employed again in any portion of the work without the approval of the Engineer.

Should the Contractor fail to remove such person or persons or fail to furnish suitable and sufficient personnel for the proper prosecution of the work, the Engineer may suspend the work by written notice until compliance with such orders is ascertained.

All equipment which is proposed to be used on the work shall be of sufficient size and in such mechanical condition as to meet the requirements of the work and to produce a satisfactory quality of work. Equipment used on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to previously completed work, adjacent property, or existing facilities will result from its use.

When the methods and equipment to be used by the Contractor in accomplishing the work are not prescribed in the Contract, the Contractor is free to use any methods or equipment that will accomplish the work in conformity with the requirements of the Contract, plans and specifications.

When the Contract specifies the use of certain methods and equipment, such methods and equipment shall be used unless others are authorized by the Engineer. If the Contractor desires to use a method or type of equipment other than specified in the Contract, he may request authority from the Engineer to do so. The request shall be in writing and shall include a full description of the methods and equipment proposed and of the reasons for desiring to make the change. If approval is given, it will be on the condition that the Contractor will be fully responsible for producing the work in conformity with Contract requirements. If, after trial use on the substituted methods or equipment, the Engineer determines that the work produced does not meet Contract requirements, the Contractor shall discontinue the use of the substitute method or equipment and shall complete the remaining work with the specified methods and equipment. The Contractor shall remove any deficient work and replace it with work of specified quality or take such other corrective action as the Engineer may direct. No change will be made in basis of payment for the Contract items involved or in Contract time as a result of authorizing a change in methods or equipment under this subsection.

90-06 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF THE WORK

The Engineer shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly, or in part, for such period or periods as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or perform any or all provisions of the Contract.

In the event that the Contractor is ordered by the Engineer, in writing, to suspend work for some unforeseen cause not otherwise provided for in the Contract and over which the Contractor has no control, the Contractor may be reimbursed for actual money expended on the work during the period of shutdown. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits. The period of shutdown shall be computed from the effective date of the Engineer's order to suspend work to the effective date of the Engineer's order to resume the work. Claims for such compensation shall be filed with the Engineer within the time period stated in the Engineer's order to resume work. The Contractor shall submit with his claim information substantiating the amount shown on the claim. The Engineer will forward the Contractor's claim to the OWNER for consideration. No provision of this article shall be construed as entitling the Contractor to compensation for delays due to inclement weather, for suspensions made at the request of the Contractor, or for any other delay provided for in the Contract, plans, or specifications.

If it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not become an obstruction nor become damaged in any way. He shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the

Page 60: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐33 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

work performed and provide for normal drainage of the work. The Contractor shall erect temporary structures where necessary to provide for traffic on, to, or from the site.

90-07 DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME

The number of calendar or working days allowed for completion of the work shall be stated in the Bid and Contract and shall be known as the CONTRACT TIME.

Should the CONTRACT TIME require extension for reasons beyond the Contractor's control, it shall be adjusted as follows:

(a) CONTRACT TIME based on WORKING DAYS shall be calculated weekly by the Engineer. The Engineer will furnish the Contractor a copy of his weekly statement of the number of working days charged against the CONTRACT TIME during the week and the number of working days currently specified for completion of the Contract (the original CONTRACT TIME plus the number of working days, if any, that have been included in approved CHANGE ORDERS, or SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENTS covering EXTRA WORK).

The Engineer shall base his weekly statement of CONTRACT TIME charges on the following considerations:

(1) No time shall be charged for days on which the Contractor is unable to proceed with the principal item of work under construction at the time for at least 6 hours with the normal work force employed on such principal item. Should the normal work force be on a triple shift, 18 hours shall apply. Conditions beyond the Contractor's control such as strikes, lockouts, unusual delays in transportation, temporary suspension of the principal item of work under construction or temporary suspension of the entire work which have been ordered by the Engineer for reasons not the fault of the Contractor, shall not be charged against the CONTRACT TIME.

(2) The Engineer will not make charges against the CONTRACT TIME prior to the effective date of the notice to proceed.

(3) The Engineer will begin charges against the CONTRACT TIME on the first working day after the effective date of the notice to proceed.

(4) The Engineer will not make charges against the CONTRACT TIME after the date of final acceptance as defined in the paragraph titled FINAL ACCEPTANCE of Subsection 60.

(5) The Contractor will be allowed one week in which to file a written protest setting forth his objections to the Engineer's weekly statement. If no objection is filed within such specified time, the weekly statement shall be considered as acceptable to the Contractor.

(6) The CONTRACT TIME (state in the Bid) is based on the originally estimated quantities as described in the paragraph titled INTERPRETATION OF ESTIMATED BID QUANTITIES of Subsection 20. Should the satisfactory completion of the Contract require performance of work in greater quantities than those estimated in the Bid, the CONTRACT TIME shall be increased in the same proportion as the cost of the actually completed quantities bears to the cost of the originally estimated quantities in the Bid. Such increase in CONTRACT TIME shall not consider either the cost of work or the extension of CONTRACT TIME that has been covered by change order or supplemental agreement and shall be made at the time of final payment.

(b) CONTRACT TIME based on CALENDAR DAYS shall consist of the number of calendar days stated in the Contract counting from the effective date of the notice to proceed and including all Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, and no work days. All calendar days elapsing

Page 61: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐34 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

between the effective dates of the Engineer's orders to suspend and resume all work, due to causes not the fault of the Contract, shall be excluded.

At the time of final payment, the CONTRACT TIME shall be increased in the same proportion as the cost that the actually completed quantities bear to the cost of the originally estimated quantities in the Bid. Such increase in the CONTRACT TIME shall not consider either the cost of work of the extension of CONTRACT TIME that has been covered by a change order or supplemental agreement. Charges against the CONTRACT TIME will cease as of the date of final agreement.

(c) When the CONTRACT TIME is a specified completion date, it shall be the date on which all Contract work shall be substantially completed.

If the Contractor finds it impossible for reasons beyond his control to complete the work within the Contract time as specified, or as extended in accordance with the provisions of this subsection, he may, at any time prior to the expiration of the CONTRACT TIME as extended, make a written request to the Engineer for an extension of time setting forth the reasons which he believes will justify the granting of his request. The Contractor's plea that insufficient time was specified is not a valid reason for extension of time. If the Engineer finds that the work was delayed because of conditions beyond the control and without the fault of the Contractor, he may extend the time for completion in such amount as the conditions justify. The extended time for completion shall then be in full force and effect, the same as though it were the original time for completion.

90-08 FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME

For Each calendar day or working day, as specified in the Contract, that any work remains incomplete after the CONTRACT TIME (including all extensions and adjustments as provided in the paragraph titled DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME of this Subsection) the sum specified in the Contract and Bid as liquidated damages will be deducted from any money due or to become due the Contractor or his surety. Such deducted sums shall not be deducted as a penalty but shall be considered as liquidation of a reasonable portion of damages that will be incurred by the OWNER should the Contractor fail to complete the work in the time provided in his Contract.

The Contractor will not be charged with liquidated damages when delay in completion of the work is due to acts of the public enemy, acts of the OWNER, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a Contract with the OWNER, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, or freight embargoes.

Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after the time fixed for its completion, or after the date to which the time for completion may have been extended, will in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the OWNER of any rights under the Contract.

90-09 CONTRACT DEFAULT

The Contractor shall be considered in default of his Contract and such default will be considered as cause for the OWNER to terminate the Contract for any of the following reasons if the Contractor:

(a) Fails to begin the work under the Contract within the time specified in the “Notice to Proceed”; or

(b) Fails to perform the work or fails to provide sufficient workers, equipment or materials to assure completion of work in accordance with the terms of the Contract; or

(c) Performs the work unsuitably or neglects or refuses to remove materials or to perform anew such work as may be rejected as unacceptable and unsuitable; or

Page 62: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐35 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

(d) Discontinues the prosecution of the work; or

(e) Fails to resume work which has been discontinued within a reasonable time after notice to do so; or

(f) Becomes insolvent or is declared bankrupt, or commits an act of bankruptcy or insolvency; or

(g) Allows any final judgment to stand against him unsatisfied for a period of 10 days; or

(h) Makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors; or

(i) For any other cause whatsoever, fails to carry on the work in an acceptable manner.

Should the Engineer consider the Contractor in default of the Contract for any reason hereinbefore, he shall immediately give written notice to the Contractor and the Contractor's surety as to the reasons for considering the construction in default and the OWNER's intentions to terminate the Contract.

If the Contractor or surety, within a period of 10 days after such notice, does not proceed in accordance therewith, then the OWNER will, upon written notification from the Engineer of the facts of such delay, neglect, or default and the Contractor's failure to comply with such notice, have full power and authority without violating the Contract, to take the prosecution of the work out of the hands of the Contractor. The OWNER may appropriate or use any or all materials and equipment that have been mobilized for use in the work and are acceptable and may enter into an agreement for the completion of said Contract according to the terms and provisions thereof, or use such other methods as in the opinion of the Engineer will be required for the completion of said Contract in an acceptable manner.

All costs and charges incurred by the OWNER, together with the cost of completing the work under Contract, will be deducted from any monies due or which may become due the Contractor. If such expense exceeds the sum which would have been payable under the Contract, then the Contractor and the surety shall be liable and shall pay to the OWNER the amount of such excess.

90-10 CONTRACT TERMINATION

The Owner may terminate the Contract, or any portion hereof, for just cause by written notice to the Contractor.

When the Contract, or any portion thereof, is terminated before completion of all items of work in the Contract, payment will be made for the actual number of units or items of work completed or started. No claims for loss of anticipated profits shall be considered.

Acceptable materials both in quantity and quality obtained or ordered by the Contractor that are not incorporated into the work shall, at the option of the Contractor, be purchased by the Owner at actual cost as shown by receipted bills and actual cost records. Delivery of the materials will be performed as designated by the Engineer.

Termination of the Contract, or a portion thereof, shall neither relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the completed work nor relieve his surety of its obligation for and concerning any just claim arising out of the work performed.

The costs incurred by the Contractor for mobilization, if applicable, shall be itemized and presented to the Owner. Rebates and refunds that are applicable shall be itemized, and the amount paid the Contractor shall be adjusted to reflect actual cost as shown by receipted bills and actual cost records.

The cost of demobilization of Contractor's equipment and other items pertaining to the expense of moving off the job site shall be itemized and supported by actual cost records and presented

Page 63: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐36 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

for payment. Demobilization as a percentage of the Contract amount, or portion thereof, shall not be paid.

Reimbursement for organization of the work and overhead expenses (when not otherwise included in the Contract) will be considered, the intent being that an equitable settlement will be made with the Contractor.

All of the above are subject to audit as specified by the Right to Audit, Paragraph 100-11.

Page 64: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐37 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

SECTION 100 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

100-01 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES

All work completed under the Contract will be quantified by the Engineer, or his authorized representatives.

The method of quantifying to be used in determination of quantities of material furnished and of work performed under the Contract will be those methods generally recognized as conforming to good Engineering practice.

The term “Lump Sum” when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment for the work described in the Contract.

Rental of equipment will be measured by time in hours of actual working time and necessary traveling time of the equipment within the limits of the work. Special equipment ordered by the Engineer in connection with work will be measured as agreed in the change order or supplemental agreement authorizing such work as provided in the paragraph titled PAYMENT FOR EXTRA AND WORK of this section.

100-02 SCOPE OF PAYMENT

The Contractor shall receive and accept compensation provided for in the Contract as full payment for furnishing all materials, for performing all work under the Contract in a complete and acceptable manner, and for all risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever character arising out of the nature of the work or the prosecution thereof, subject to the provisions of the paragraph titled NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS of Subsection 80.

100-03 COMPENSATION FOR ALTERED QUANTITIES

When the accepted quantities of work vary from the quantities in the Bid, the Contractor shall accept as payment in full, so far as Contract items are concerned, payment at the original Contract Unit Price for the accepted quantities of work actually completed and accepted. No allowance, except as provided for in the paragraph titled ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES of Subsection 50 will be made for any increased expense, loss of expected reimbursement, or loss of anticipated profits suffered or claimed by the Contractor which results directly from such alterations or indirectly from his unbalanced allocation of overhead and profit among the Contract items, or from any other cause.

100-04 PAYMENT FOR OMITTED ITEMS

As specified in the paragraph titled OMITTED ITEMS of Subsection 50, the Engineer shall have the right to omit from the work (order nonperformance) any Contract item, except major Contract items, in the best interest of the OWNER.

Should the Engineer omit or order nonperformance of a Contract item or portion of such item from the work, the Contractor shall accept payment in full at the Contract prices for any work actually completed and acceptable prior to the Engineer's order to omit or not perform such Contract item.

Acceptable materials ordered by the Contractor or delivered on the work prior to the date of the OWNER's order will be paid for at the actual cost to the Contractor and shall thereupon become the property of the OWNER.

In addition to the reimbursement hereinbefore provided, the Contractor shall be reimbursed for all actual costs incurred for the purpose of performing the omitted Contract item prior to the date of the Engineer's order. Such additional costs incurred by the Contractor must be directly

Page 65: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐38 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

related to the deleted Contract item and shall be supported by certified statements by the Contractor as to the nature and amount of such costs.

100-05 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK

Extra work, performed in accordance with the paragraph titled EXTRA WORK of Subsection 50, will be paid for at the Contract prices or agreed prices specified in the change order or supplemental agreement authorizing such extra work. When the change order or supplemental agreement authorizing the extra work requires that it be done by force account, such force account shall be measured and paid for as follows:

(a) Labor: For all labor (skilled and unskilled) and foremen in direct charge of a specific force account item, the Contractor shall receive the rate of wage (or scale) for every hour that such laborer or foreman is actually engaged in the specified force account work. Such wage (or scale) shall be agreed upon in writing before beginning the work.

The Contractor shall receive the actual costs paid to, or in behalf of, workers by reason of subsistence and travel allowances, health and welfare benefits, pension funds benefits or other benefits, when such amounts are required by collective bargaining agreement or other employment Contract generally applicable to the classes of labor employed on the work.

An amount equal to fifteen percent (15%) of the sum of the above items will also be paid the Contractor.

(b) Insurance and Taxes: For property damage, liability, and workmen's compensation insurance premiums, unemployment insurance contributions, and social security taxes on the force account work, the Contractor shall receive the actual cost, and to this cost (sum) 5 percent will be added. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for such insurance and taxes.

(c) Materials: For materials accepted by the Engineer and used, the Contractor shall receive the actual cost of such materials delivered on the work, including transportation charges paid by him (exclusive of machinery rentals as hereinafter set forth), to which cost (sum) 10 percent will be added.

(d) Equipment: For any machinery or special equipment (other than small tools) including fuel and lubricants, plus transportation costs, the use of which has been authorized by the Engineer, the Contractor shall receive the rental rates agreed upon in writing before such work is begun for the actual time that such equipment is committed to the work.

(e) Miscellaneous: No additional allowance will be made for general superintendence, the use of small tools, or other costs for which no specific allowance is herein provided.

(f) Comparison of Records: The Contractor and the Engineer shall compare records of the cost of force account work at the end of each day. Agreement shall be indicated by signature of the Contractor and Engineer or their duly authorized representatives.

(g) Statements: No payment will be made for work performing on a force account basis until the Contractor has furnished the Engineer with the duplicate itemized statements of the cost of such force account work detailed as follows:

(1) Name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours, rate and extension for each laborer and foreman.

(2) Designation, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, and extension for each unit of machinery and equipment.

Page 66: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐39 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

(3) Quantities of materials, prices, and extensions.

(4) Transportation of materials.

(5) Cost of property damage, liability and workmen's compensation insurance premiums, unemployment insurance contributions, and social security tax.

Statements shall be accompanied and supported by receipted invoice for all materials used and transportation charges. However, if materials used on the force account work are not specifically purchased for such work but are taken from the Contractor’s stock, then in lieu of the invoices the Contractor shall furnish an affidavit certifying that such materials were taken from his stock, that the quantity claimed, was actually used, and that the price and transportation claimed represent the actual cost provided above shall constitute full compensation for such work.

100-06 PARTIAL PAYMENT

Partial payments will be made Once each Month as the work progresses. Said payments will be based upon estimates prepared by the Engineer of the value of the work performed and materials complete in place in accordance with the Contract, plans, and specifications. Such partial payments may also include the delivered actual cost of those materials stockpiled and stored in accordance with the subsection titled PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND of this subsection.

No partial payment will be made when the amount due the Contractor since the last estimate is less than five hundred dollars.

From the total of the amount determined to be payable on a partial payment, 10 percent of such total amount will be deducted and retained by the OWNER until the final payment is made. The balance (90 percent) of the amount payable, less all previous payments, shall be certified for payment.

When not less than 95% of the work has been completed the Engineer may, at his discretion and without the consent of the surety, prepare an estimate from which will be retained an amount not less than twice the Contract value or estimated cost, whichever is greater, of the work remaining to be done. The remainder, less all previous payments and deductions, will then be certified for payment to the Contractor.

It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to demand or receive partial payment based on quantities or work in excess of those provided in the Bid or covered by approved change orders or supplemental agreements, except when such excess quantities have been determined by the Engineer to be a part of the final quantity for the item of work in question.

No partial payment shall bind the OWNER to the acceptance of any materials or work in place as to quality or quantity. All partial payments are subject to correction at the time of final payment as provided in the paragraph titled FINAL PAYMENT of this subsection.

100-07 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND

NOT APPLICABLE

Page 67: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐40 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

100-08 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT

Subsequent to the final acceptance of this project by the Engineer, the following requirements must be satisfied by the Contractor before final payment can be made.

(a) The Contractor must publicly advertise the NOTICE OF COMPLETION furnished by the Engineer in accordance with Title 39, Code of Alabama, 1975.

(b) The Contractor must execute copies of CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF CLAIMS AND DEBTS on the form furnished by the Engineer.

(c) The Contractor must have his surety execute copies of CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT on the form furnished by the Engineer.

(d) The Contractor must furnish a letter on his letterhead acknowledging that acceptance of final payment by the Contractor constitutes a waiver of all claims, present or future, in connection with this project.

(e) The Contractor must furnish a written guarantee on his letterhead covering all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final acceptance.

(f) If any purchased items have been incorporated in the work, the Contractor must furnish a letter on his letterhead assigning those warranties to the OWNER. Copies of said warranties shall be bound in one binder and submitted along with the letter assignment.

(g) The Contractor must keep track of “as built” information and at the contract closeout provide one complete set of reproducible “as builts” covering all earthwork, utility routing, structural, mechanical, and electrical aspects of the work, including wiring schematics.

100-09 WITHHOLDING FOR CLAIMS AND LITIGATION

If at the time of Contract close-out, the project is subject to a claim or the Contractor is involved in litigation concerning the project, the OWNER reserves the right to:

(a) Refuse to close out the Contract retaining all monies unpaid until such time as all claims are dropped and litigation is resolved, or

(b) Refuse to close out the Contract, retaining enough money to cover the total of all outstanding claims and amounts claimed by litigation until such time as all claims are dropped and litigation is resolved, or

(c) Require the Contractor to post a letter of credit to each individual claimant or litigant and satisfactory to the claimant or litigant. Once such letters of credit have been posted and the OWNER is in receipt of written agreement from each individual claimant or litigant, the OWNER will proceed with Contract close-out and release of retainage in the normal manner.

Page 68: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐41 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

100-10 FINAL PAYMENT

When the Contract work has been accepted in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph titled FINAL ACCEPTANCE of Subsection 60, and the paragraph titled Contract CLOSE-OUT above, the Engineer will prepare the final estimate of the items of work actually performed. The Contractor shall approve the Engineer's final estimate or advise the Engineer of his objections to the final estimate, which are based on disputes in measurements or computations of the final quantities to be paid under the Contract, as amended by change order or supplemental agreement. The Contractor and Engineer shall resolve all disputes (if any) in the measurement and computation of final quantities to be paid within 30 calendar days of the Contractor's receipt of the Engineer's final estimate. If, after such 30-day period, a dispute still exists, the Contractor may approve the Engineer's estimate under protest of the quantities in dispute and such disputed quantities shall be considered by the OWNER as a claim in accordance with the paragraph titled CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND DISPUTES of Subsection 60.

After the Contractor has approved, or approved under protest, the Engineer's final estimate, final payment will be processed based on the entire sum, or the undisputed sum in case of approval under protest, determined to be due the Contractor less all previous payments and all amounts to be deducted under the provisions of the Contract.

If the Contractor has filed a claim for additional compensation under the provisions of the paragraph titled CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES of Subsection 60 or under the provisions of this subsection, such claims will be considered by the OWNER in accordance with State laws or ordinances. Upon final adjudication of such claims, any additional payment determined to be due the Contractor will be paid pursuant to a supplemental final estimate.

100-11 RIGHT OF AUDIT

Contractor's records which shall include but not be limited to accounting records (hard copy, as well as computer readable data if it can be made available), written policies and procedures; subcontract files (including Bids of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps, etc.); original estimates; estimating work sheets; correspondence; change order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements); backcharge logs and supporting documentation; general ledger entries detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance policies, rebates and dividends; and any other supporting evidence deemed necessary by the Owner to substantiate charges related to this Contract (all foregoing hereinafter referred to as “records”) shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction by Owner's agent or its authorized representative to the extent necessary to adequately permit evaluation and verification of (a) Contractor compliance with Contract requirements, (b) compliance with Owner's business ethics policies, and (c) compliance with provisions for pricing change orders, payment or claims submitted by the Contractor or any of their payees.

Such audits may require inspection and copying from time to time and at reasonable times and places of any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character, including without limitation, records, books, papers, documents, subscriptions, recordings, agreements, purchase orders, leases, Contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, superintendent reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may in Owner's judgment have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Document. Such records subject to audit shall also include, but not be limited to, those records necessary to evaluate and verify direct and indirect costs, (including overhead allocations) as they may apply to costs associated with this Contract.

The Owner or its designee shall be afforded access to all of the Contractor's records, and shall be allowed to interview any of the Contractor's employees, pursuant to the provisions of this

Page 69: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

      IV‐42 | P a g e  

 

(rev 3/31/11) 

 

article throughout the term of this Contract and for a period of three (3) years after final payment or longer if required by law.

Contractor shall require all subcontractors, insurance agents, and material suppliers (payees) to comply with the provisions of this article by insertion of the requirements hereof in a written Contract agreement between Contractor and payee. Such requirements will also apply to Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors, etc. Contractor will cooperate fully and will cause all Related Parties and all of Contractor's subcontractors (including those entering into Lump Sum subcontracts) to cooperate fully in furnishing or in making available to Owner from time to time, whenever requested, in an expeditious manner, any and all such information, materials and data.

Owner's agent or its authorized representative shall have access to the Contractor's facilities, shall have access to the Subcontractor's facilities, shall have access to all necessary records, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space, in order to conduct audits in compliance with this article.

If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this article, discloses overcharges (of any nature) by the Contractor to the Owner in excess of one percent (1%) of the total Contract billings, the actual cost of the Owner's audit shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor. Any adjustments and/or payments which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of the Contractor's invoices and/or records shall be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed 90 days) from presentation of Owner's findings to Contractor.

Page 70: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01 October 2018  1 | P a g e  

 

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION V

INDEX

 

SECTION 501 – GENERAL PROVISIONS………………………………………………..V-1 SECTION 502 – SUMMARY OF WORK…………………………………………………. V-2

SECTION 503 – ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS .……………………………………. V-2

SECTION 504 – LED LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS .……….…………………………. V-2

SECTION 505 – SURGE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS .…………………………. V-2

SECTION 506 – CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS .………………….……………………. V-2

Page 71: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019       V‐1 | P a g e  

  

SECTION 501 GENERAL PROVISIONS

The following detail Specifications, taken in conjunction with the Drawings and the General Clauses and applicable Material Specifications describe the work to be performed by the Contractor. They amplify and explain most items in connection with the work, but do not alter the scope of same as described in the General Clauses of the Specifications and Contract form. All materials used in the work, which are not described specifically, shall be of the best quality that it is customary to employ in construction of the character involved. The following details are not necessarily complete in the description of all items entering into the work, but are intended to furnish a basis for acceptance of the more important items. Other details shall be consistent with them. Any detail which may be incomplete or lacking in the plans and specifications shall not constitute claim for extra compensation. Such detail shall be supplied by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer in advance of its requirement on the job. The true intent of the plans and specifications is to produce a complete working facility and incomplete detail will not abrogate this intent. It is the intent to follow the Drawings and Specifications closely in all details, elevations, dimensions, etc., but it is understood that alterations may be required to conform to local conditions and that such alterations must be of the same character of construction as that specified. Workmanship shall be of the best quality in each class of work. Current (latest) editions of all codes specified shall apply.

Page 72: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

Alabama State Port Authority Specification Booklet 

Project Name Main Docks Lighting Upgrade Project

Location ASPA Main Docks

RFP # ASPA-TS-2018-01   July 2019       V‐2 | P a g e  

  

SECTION 502 SUMMARY OF THE WORK

502.01 SUMMARY

This section includes the work covered by the Contract Documents and identifies requirements in addition to the work indicated on the plans and elsewhere in the Specifications.

502.02 WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The work consists of:

1. Mobilization of supplies, equipment and personnel to site for project execution. 2. One for One Light Fixture Replacement. 3. Surge Protection Equipment Installation. 4. Optional Controls Installation. 5. Demobilization of Project.

502.03 WORK SEQUENCE

The sequence of work must be as necessary to complete within the specified 240 days after Notice to Proceed is issued.

See Attachments for the following Sections :

SECTION 503 – ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 504 – LED LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 505 – SURGE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 506 – CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS

Page 73: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 1 of 12

Attachment B

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

Each of the insurance coverages required shall be issued by an insurer licensed by the Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of insurance in the State of Alabama for the applicable line of insurance, and such insurer (or, for qualified self-insureds or group self-insureds, a specific excess insurer providing statutory limits) must have an A.M. Best Company Policyholders Rating of "A-" or better and a financial size rating of Class V or larger.

Each policy shall be endorsed to provide that the insurance company agrees that the policy shall not be canceled, changed, allowed to lapse, or allowed to expire for any reason until thirty (30) days after the ASPA has received written notice by certified mail as evidenced by return receipt or until such time as other insurance coverage providing protection equal to protection called for herein shall have been received, accepted, and acknowledged by the ASPA. Such notice shall be valid only as to the project as shall have been designated by Project Name and Number in said notice. Insurance certificates must provide the following information:

(1) Name and address of authorized agent of the insurance company (2) Name and address of insured (3) Name of insurance company or companies (4) Description of policies (5) Policy Number(s) (6) Policy Period(s) (7) Limits of liability (8) Name and address of the ASPA as certificate holder (9) Project Name and Number, if any (10) Signature of authorized agent of the insurance company (11) Telephone number of authorized agent of the insurance company (12) Mandatory thirty (30)-day notice of cancellation, non-renewal, or change (13) See Attached

Unless otherwise provided, the PROPOSER shall purchase the types of insurance coverages and with not less than the indicated liability limits as follows:

(1) Worker’s Compensation Coverage shall be provided in accordance with the

statutory coverage required in Alabama. A group insurer must submit a certificate of authority from the Alabama Department of Industrial Relations approving the group insurance plan. A self-insurer must submit a certificate from the Alabama Department of Industrial Relations stating the Architect qualifies to pay its own workers compensation claims.

(2) Employer’s Liability Insurance limits shall be at least:

(a) Bodily Injury by Accident - $1,000,000 each accident (b) Bodily Injury by Disease - $1,000,000 each employee

Page 74: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 2 of 12

(3) Commercial General Liability Insurance, written on an ISO Occurrence Form

(current edition as of the date of this Agreement) or equivalent, which shall include, but need not be limited to, coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from premises and operations liability, products and completed operations liability, personal injury liability, and contractual liability.

(a) The Commercial General Liability Insurance shall provide, at a minimum, the following limits:

Coverage Limit

1. General Aggregate $ 2,000,000 2. Products, Completed Operations Aggregate $ 2,000,000 3. Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000 per

occurrence 4. Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000

(b) The Commercial General Liability Insurance policy shall name the ASPA and its Agents andEemployees as an additional insured and shall state that this coverage shall be primary insurance for the additional insured.

(4) Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance which shall include coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from the operation of any owned, non-owned, or hired automobile. The Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance Policy shall provide not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) Combined Single Limits for each occurrence and shall name the ASPA, and its agents, consultants, and employees as additional insureds.

(5) Railroad Protective Liability Insurance – In any case where the Contract involves work within 50 feet of an operating

railroad track, the Contractor shall provide a Railroad Protective Liability policy in the name of the railroad whose right of way is involved. The limits of the policy shall be not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence with $6,000,000 aggregate.

NOTE #1: With the written approval of the Owner, in lieu of the Railroad Protective Liability policy, the Contractor may cause to be attached to its Commercial General Liability policy standard ISO endorsement, “Contractual Liability – Railroads” (CG 24 17). The railroad must be identified as an Additional Insured and in the amounts listed above. This shall be documented and provided beforehand with the ASPA Project Manager.

NOTE #2: Only the Contractor and/or Subcontractor performing the work within 50 feet of the railroad track shall be required to provide evidence of this coverage. In the event the Contractor Subcontractors for this portion of the work, the Contractor shall not allow the Subcontractor to commence work until such coverage has first been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Owner. This shall be documented and provided beforehand with the ASPA Project Manager.

PROPOSER shall have responsibility to enforce its Consultants and Subcontractors compliance with these insurance requirements.

PROPOSER shall provide the ASPA acceptable evidence of Insurance for All Consultants and Subcontractors to ASPA Project Manager Rick Smith, P.E.

Page 75: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 3 of 12

Attachment C

ADDITIONAL REQUIRED INFORMATION and FORMS

State of Alabama Disclosure Statement ASPA Facility Access Requirements Beason-Hammon Alabama Taxpayer and Citizen Protection Act Bid Bond Form Proposed Subcontractors Form

Page 76: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 4 of 12

Page 77: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 5 of 12

Page 78: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 6 of 12

ALABAMA STATE PORT AUTHORITY ACCESS POLICY

It is the policy of the Alabama State Port Authority (ASPA or “the Authority”) that all persons permanently and temporarily employed at the port, including ASPA staff, tenants and their employees, surveyors, agents, stevedores, longshoremen, chaplains, Contract labor and persons requesting temporary access to the port, including delivery persons, vendors, contractors, and temporary workers must display, above the waist and outside of clothing, an ASPA issued photo ID badge or visitor badge at all times when accessing or working on port property, as required by the Maritime Transportation Security Act of 2002 and USCG, 33 CFR, Part 105.

Piers, wharves, warehouses, open cargo storage areas, loading and unloading areas, rail spurs and holding tracks, areas containing critical facility infrastructure and operations and administrative offices have been designated as restricted access areas, and persons requesting access to these areas must present a completed application and submit to an Alabama state background investigation to obtain an ASPA Identification badge granting access as stated on the badge. A non-refundable fee, payable in advance to cover the costs of the background check, training and processing, will be required to initiate the process.

In accordance with U.S. Coast Guard regulation 33 CFR 101.514, effective December 30, 2008, as a precondition to receiving an ASPA credential, applicants must have applied for and received a Transportation Worker Identification Credential (TWIC). A valid TWIC must be presented to ASPA credentials officers to initiate the application process. For additional information and requirements use link below. http://www.asdd.com/portaccess.html .

Page 79: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 7 of 12

BEASON-HAMMON ALABAMA TAXPAYER and CITIZEN PROTECTION ACT

Effective October 1, 2011, the Beason-Hammon Alabama Taxpayer and Citizen Protection Act (“the Act”) requires that any business entity contracting with or providing any grant or incentives to the state, including the Alabama State Port Authority, certify compliance with the Act. All proposers must certify such compliance by executing the enclosed Affidavit and returning it to the Alabama State Port Authority with your bid package. The Affidavit must be notarized.

Participation in E-Verify is required. Documentation is required.

The following E-Verify website link is provided for convenience:

http://www.dhs.gov/files/programs/gc_1185221678150.shtm.

See Certificate of Compliance on Next Page.

Page 80: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 8 of 12

Page 1 of 2   

 State of ______________________________________  County of ____________________________________  CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE BEASON‐HAMMON ALABAMA TAXPAYER AND CITIZEN PROTECTION ACT (ACT 2011‐535, as amended by Act 2012‐491)  DATE: _________________  RE Contract/Grant/Incentive (describe by number or subject): ________________________________________________ by and between _______________________________________________ _________(Contractor/Grantee) and _________________________________________________ ______(State Agency, Department or Public Entity)  The undersigned hereby certifies to the State of Alabama as follows:  1. The undersigned holds the position of __________________________ with the Contractor/Grantee named above, and 

is authorized to provide representations set out in this Certificate as the official and binding act of that entity, and has 

knowledge of the provisions of THE BEASON‐HAMMON ALABAMA TAXPAYER AND CITIZEN PROTECTION ACT (ACT 201 1‐

535 of the Alabama Legislature, as amended by Act 2012‐491) which is described herein as "the Act". 

2. Using the following definitions from Section 3 of the Act, select and initial either (a) or (b), below, to describe the 

Contractor/Grantee's business structure.  

BUSINESS ENTITY. Any person or group of persons employing one or more persons performing or engaging in any activity, enterprise, profession, or occupation for gain, benefit, advantage, or livelihood, whether for profit or not for    profit. "Business entity" shall include, but not be limited to the following:  

a. Self‐employed individuals, business entities filing articles of incorporation, partnerships, limited partnerships, limited liability companies, foreign corporations, foreign limited partnerships, foreign limited liability companies authorized to transact business in this state, business trusts, and any business entity that registers with the Secretary of State.  

b. Any business entity that possesses a business license, permit, certificate, approval, registration, charter, or   similar form of authorization issued by the state, any business entity that is exempt by law from obtaining such a business license and any business entity that is operating unlawfully without a business license. 

 EMPLOYER. Any person, firm, corporation, partnership, joint stock association, agent, manager, representative, foreman, or other person having control or custody of any employment, place of employment, or of any employee, including any person or entity employing any person for hire within the State of Alabama, including a public employer. This term shall not include the occupant of a household contracting with another person to perform casual domestic labor within the household. 

 ____ (a) The Contractor/Grantee is a business entity or employer as those terms are defined in Section 3 of the Act. ____ (b) The Contractor/Grantee is not a business entity or employer as those terms are defined in Section 3 of the Act. 

  

 

Page 81: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 9 of 12

Page 2 of 2   CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE BEASON‐HAMMON ALABAMA TAXPAYER AND CITIZEN PROTECTION ACT (ACT 2011‐535, as amended by Act 2012‐491)  

 

 

3. As of the date of this Certificate, Contractor/Grantee does not knowingly employ an unauthorized alien within the State 

of Alabama and hereafter it will not knowingly employ, hire for employment, or continue to employ an unauthorized 

alien within the State of Alabama;  

4. Contractor/Grantee is enrolled in E‐Verify unless it is not eligible to enroll because of the rules of that program or other 

factors beyond its control. 

  

 Certified this ______ day of __________________ 20 _____ 

                                Name of Contractor/Grantee/Recipient                 _______________________________________                         

 By: _______________________________________                         

Its ________________________________________  

 The above Certification was signed in my presence by the person whose name appears above, on 

 this ______ day of ___________________ 20_____. 

                         

WITNESS:   ___________________________________________                                                   ___________________________________________                                     Printed Name of Witness 

   

Page 82: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 10 of 12

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, undersigned, ______________________

________________________ as Principal, and _______________________________________ as Surety, are hereby held and bound unto The Alabama State Port Authority as OWNER in the Penal sum of _______________________________ for the payment of which will and truly be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors and assigns. Signed, the ______ day of ___________________, 20___.

The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the Alabama State Port Authority a certain BID, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a Contract in writing, for the LIGHTING ENERGY PERFORMANCE CONTRACTING SERVICES in Mobile, Alabama, RFP No. ASPA-TS-2018-01 .

NOW, THEREFORE,

(a) If said BID shall be rejected, or

(b) If said BID shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the form of Contract attached hereto (Properly completed in accordance with said BID) and shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said BID, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the panel amount of this obligation as herein stated.

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its BOND shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of time within which the OWNER may accept such BID; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.

Principal

Surety

By

 

Page 83: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 11 of 12

PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM

PARTICULARS Herewith is the list of Subcontractors referenced in the bid submitted by: (Proposer) ____________________________________ To (Owner) Dated ___________________ and which is an integral part of the Proposal Form. The following work will be performed (or provided) by Subcontractors and coordinated by us: LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS WORK SUBJECT - SUBCONTRACTOR NAME

Page 84: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

 

  

Attachment D  

        

Bid Table – Schedule of Prices

Bid Table – Schedule of Prices for Controls Additive Alternate

Electrical Specifications   

LED Lighting Specifications Transient Surge Suppression Specifications Network Lighting Controls                                     

Page 85: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Interior / Exterior

Type Watts Volts Qty

1 Container Yard Exterior MH / Pole Flood Lights 1000 W 480V 9 Each

South Exterior MH / HM Pole Flood 1000 W 480V 36 Each

(Berth 2) ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

2 Container Yard Exterior MH / Pole Lights 1000 W 480V 14 Each

North ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

(Berths 3 - 4)

3 Container Yard Exterior HPS / Pole 1000 W 480V 14 Each

North ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc 1000 W 480V 48 Each

(Berths 5 - 8) ~~ ~~ 1 Each

4 Berth 3 Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 208V 72 Each

Exterior HPS 1000 W 208V 9 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

5 Berth 4 Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 208V 72 Each

Exterior HPS 1000 W 208V 14 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

6 Berth 5 Wharf Exterior HPS / Pole Light 1000 W 208V 18 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

7 Berth 6 Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 208V 84 Each

Exterior HPS / 1000 W 208V 17 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

8 Berth 7 Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 208V 79 Each

Exterior HPS 1000 W 208V 16 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

9 Berth 8 Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 480V 79 Each

(Riverside) Exterior HPS Flood & Wallpacks 1000 W 480V 24 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

10 Berth 3, 4, 6, 7, & 8 Exterior HPS Wall Pack 400 W 208V 30 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

ATTACHMENT A

BID TABLE - SCHEDULE OF PRICES

Location Item

Existing FixturesTo Be Replaced

UOMUnit Price

Value

Page 1 of 6

Page 86: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Interior / Exterior

Type Watts Volts QtyLocation Item

Existing FixturesTo Be Replaced

UOMUnit Price

Value

11 Warehouse 8 Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 480V 79 Each

(Landside) Exterior HPS Flood Pipe Mount 1000 W 480V 16 Each

Exterior HPS Wallpack 250W 480V 13 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

~~ ~~

12 Unit 19 Lumber Interior HPS - High Bay 150 W ??? 36 Each

Warehouse Exterior HPS 150W ??? 3 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

13 South A Exterior HPS Flood 1000 W 480V 24 Each

Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400W 480V 89 Each

Canopy Dock Floodlight 300W 120V 2 Each

Interior Fluor 4-F40T12 160W 480V 10 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

14 A-18 Warehouse Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 240 V 56 Each

Exterior HPS - Flood 1000 W 240 V 13 Each

Exterior HPS - Flood 400W 240 V 18 Each

Interior Incand Pend - Elec Rm 300W 240V 3 Each

Interior Incand Wall - Doorways 300W 240V 3 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

15 Center A Interior HPS - High Bay Pend 300 W 208V 51 Each

Warehouse Canopy HPS - High Bay Pend 150W 208V 12 Each

Exterior HPS - Flood Wall Mt 300W 208V 3 Each

Exterior HPS - Flood Wall Mt 500W 208V 4 Each

Exterior HPS - Flood Wall Mt 150W 208V 3 Each

Interior Incand - Surface Mt 150W 208V 3 Each

Interior Incand - Gooseneck Mt 150W 208V 2 Each

Interior 8FT Fluor T8 BR 128 W 120V 4 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

Page 2 of 6

Page 87: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Interior / Exterior

Type Watts Volts QtyLocation Item

Existing FixturesTo Be Replaced

UOMUnit Price

Value

16 North A Interior HPS - High Bay Pend 400 W 277V 112 Each

Warehouse Exterior HPS Flood Bullhorn Mt 1000 W 277V 58 Each

Exterior HPS Pipe Mount 400 W 277V 12 Each

Interior 1x4 Fluor T8 BR Surf. 64W 120V 14 Each

Interior 1x4 Fluor T8 Xform Rm Lt S f

64W 120V 8 Each

Interior Incand Surface Clear Lens 100W 120V 15 Each

Interior Incand Surface Red 100W 120V 3 Each

Canopy HPS - High Bay Pend 400 W 277V 21 Each

Exterior HPS Park Lot 20' Pole 250 W 277V 7 Each

Exterior HPS HM 100' Pole 1000W 277V 12 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

17 Admin Bldg. Exterior HPS Floods 1000W 240V 14 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

.

18 South Interior 4FT Fluor T12 160W 120V 4 Each

Substation ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

19 South B Interior HPS - Low Bay Light 400 W 480V 196 Each

Warehouse Exterior MH Floodlight 6x5 Bullhorn 1000 W 480V 86 Each

Canopy HPS - Low Bay Light - Wet 400 W 480V 36 Each

Interior S f

4FT Fluor T12 Xform & BR V i h P d

160W 120V 8 Each

Interior Incand Wall Bracket 100W 120V 4 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

20 North B Interior MH - High Bay, Pend 400 W 277V 249 Each

Warehouse Exterior HPS Flood - 6x6, Wet 1000 W 480V 92 Each

Exterior HPS Flood - 6x6, Wet 1000 W 480V 17 Each

Exterior MH Canopy Wet 400 W 277V 61 Each

Interior 1x4 Fluor T8 BR/Xform 64W 120V 15 Each

Interior Incand Surf Vaportite 100W 120V 5 Each

Interior Incand Surf Red Vaportite 100W 120V 1 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

Page 3 of 6

Page 88: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Interior / Exterior

Type Watts Volts QtyLocation Item

Existing FixturesTo Be Replaced

UOMUnit Price

Value

21 South C Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 480V 386 Each

Warehouse Exterior HPS - Flood 1000 W 480V 163 Each

Exterior HPS / Security Ltg 250 W 480V 25 Each

Interior 4FT Fluor T12 BR 128 W 120V 4 Each

Exterior HPS / Canopy Ltg 400 W 480V 34 Each

Exterior HPS / Parking Lot Pole 1000 W 480V 10 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

22 North C Wharf Exterior HPS / Pole Lights 1000 W 480V 72 Each

Interior 4' Fluor T12 Xform Rm 64 W 120V 4 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

23 Pier D Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 277V 36 Each

Warehouse ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

24 Pier D & D2 Yard Exterior HPS / High Mast Pole 1000 W 480V 80 Each

Exterior MH / Pole Lighting 1000 W 480V 24 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

25 Berth E North Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 480V 120 Each

Warehouse Exterior HPS Canopy 1000 W 480V 12 Each

Exterior HPS High Mast Pole 1000 W 480V 20 Each

Exterior HPS Flood - Pipe Mt 400W 480V 19 Each

4FT Fluor T12 BR 80W 120V 5 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

26 Berth E South Interior HPS - High Bay 400 W 480V 120 Each

Warehouse Exterior HPS Canopy 400W 480V 15 Each

Exterior HPS High Mast Pole 1000 W 480V 20 Each

Exterior HPS Flood - Pipe Mt 400W 480V 19 Each

Exterior HPS Flood - Bullhorns 1000W 480V 8 Each

Interior 4' Fluor T12 Elec Rm 80W 120V 8 Each

Interior 4FT Fluor T12 BR 80W 120V 2 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

27 Garage Exterior Wall Pack 250W 240V 6 Each

Exterior Fuel canopy Lights 250W 240V 4 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

28 Unit 16 Warehouse Interior MV High Bay 400 W 120V 48 Each

(Delchamps Street) ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

Page 4 of 6

Page 89: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Interior / Exterior

Type Watts Volts QtyLocation Item

Existing FixturesTo Be Replaced

UOMUnit Price

Value

29 Truck Scales Exterior MH / Pole Lights 1000 W 480V 10 Each

Exterior MH Canopy Lts Surface 400W 120V 10 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

30 Pig Iron Dock Exterior HPS / Pole Lights 1000 W 480V 10 Each

Exterior HPS / Flood Lights 1000 W 480V 8 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

.

31 Aluminum Yard Exterior MH / Pole Lights 1000 W 480V 12 Each

at Pier D2 ~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

.

32 Police Building Exterior HPS Wallpacks 250 W 120V 9 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

33 Equipment Shop Exterior HPS Wallpacks 250 W 240V 6 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

34 Roadway Lights ASD Blvd Cobraheads 28 480V 20 Each

~~ Electrical Mods & Misc ~~ ~~ 1 Each

Page 5 of 6

Page 90: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Interior / Exterior

Type Watts Volts QtyLocation Item

Existing FixturesTo Be Replaced

UOMUnit Price

Value

35 Project Bonds & Insurance

~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1Lump Sum

36 Mobilization, Access Credentials

~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1Lump Sum

37 Submittals~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1

Lump Sum

38 Closeout Documentation

~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1Lump Sum

39 Miscellaneous~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1

Lump Sum

40 Spares (See Specifications)

~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1Lump Sum

41 Overhead and Profit

~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ 1Lump Sum

.

Notes: HPS = High Pressure ; MH = Metal Halide ; HM = High Mast ; Some High Mast Lighting is indicated as Pole Mounted here, Some are Floodlight Type, Field Verify ; See As-Built Drawings for Additional Information and Requirements ; Field Verify Voltages and Fixture Types prior to ordering equipment ; Electrical Modifications to utilize existing Voltages shall be included in Cost ; All Fixtures shall be Replaced One for One and reconnected to existing Power Circuits and Controls ; Include All Controls and Surge Protection Modications' Costs required to accomodate change to LED Fixtures. Field Verify ; All Exterior Fixtures and Under Canopy Fixtures shall be Wet Location rated and suitable for a Port Environment ; All Interior Fixtures shall be Damp or Wet Location rated and suitable for a Port Environment with High Humidity, Fog, and Inclement Weather ; All Exterior and Canopy Fixtures shall have Seal to avoid damage by environment and wildlife ; Spares shall include 5% of Each Type Fixture, Driver, LED Panels, Controls Components, etc. for emergency repairs ; Provide Spare Parts Unit Cost List that is valid for 5 years minimum ; All Project Costs shall be Included for Turn Key Installation. Bid shall include Controls Additive Alternate Table with Costs or be disqualified.

TOTAL BASE BID

Page 6 of 6

Page 91: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Item LocationInterior or Exterior

Type Quantity Unit Price

1 Container Yard Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

South

(Berth 2)

2 Container Yard Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

North

(Berths 3 - 4)

3 Container Yard Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

North

(Berths 5 - 8)

4 Berth 3 Warehouse Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS 5 Berth 4 Warehouse Interior /

ExteriorComplete Turn Key Controls System LS

6 Berth 5 Wharf Interior /

ExteriorComplete Turn Key Controls System LS

7 Berth 6 Warehouse Interior /

ExteriorComplete Turn Key Controls System LS

8 Berth 7 Warehouse Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS 9 Berth 8 Warehouse

(Riverside)Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

10 Berth 3, 4, 6, 7, & 8 Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

11 Warehouse 8 Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

(Landside)

12 Unit 19 Lumber Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

Warehouse

13 South A Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS Warehouse

14 A-18 Warehouse Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

BID TABLE - SCHEDULE OF PRICES Controls Additive Alternate

Page 1 of 4

Page 92: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Item LocationInterior or Exterior

Type Quantity Unit Price

15 Center A Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

Warehouse

16 North A Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

Warehouse .

17 Admin Bldg. Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS .

18 South Interior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS Substation .

19 South B Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

Warehouse

20 North B Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

Warehouse .

21 South C Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS Warehouse .

22 North C Wharf Interior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS .

23 Pier D Warehouse Interior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS .

24 Pier D & D2 Yard Interior / Exterior

Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

. 25 Berth E North Interior /

ExteriorComplete Turn Key Controls System LS

Warehouse .

Page 2 of 4

Page 93: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Item LocationInterior or Exterior

Type Quantity Unit Price

26 Berth E South Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS Warehouse .

27 Garage Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS .

28 Unit 16 Warehouse Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS (Delchamps Street) .

29 Truck Scales Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS .

30 Pig Iron Dock Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS .

31 Aluminum Yard Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS at Pier D2 .

32 Police Building Exterior Complete Turn Key Controls System LS

33 Roadway Lights ASD Blvd Cobraheads with HD Photocells LS

Page 3 of 4

Page 94: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Item LocationInterior or Exterior

Type Quantity Unit Price

34 Submittals Lump Sum

35 Closeout Documentation

Lump Sum

36 Miscellaneous Lump Sum

35 Spares 5%Lump Sum

Notes: Include All Additional Cost for Dimmable Fixtures, Motion Detectors, Electrical Modifications, Appurtenances, etc. Existing Controls Wiring and Conduits may be reused if deemed serviceable by Contratcor who assumes All responsibility for All Cost to provide a Fully Complete and Functional Control System, Field Verify prior to Proposal ; See As-Built Drawings for Additional Information and Requirements ; Field Verify Voltages and Fixture Types prior to ordering equipment ; Electrical Modifications to utilize existing Voltages shall be included in Proposal's Cost ; ASPA reseves the right to select which locations will have New Controls System installed based upon funding ; Spares shall include 5% of Each Type Fixture, Driver, LED Panels, Controls Components, etc. for emergency repairs; Provide Spare Parts Unit Cost List that is valid for 10 years minimum; Proposal shall include Descriptive Narrative for Each Location's New Controls proposed installation ; All Project Costs shall be Included for Turn Key Installation at All Locations.

GUARANTEED ANNUAL NET SAVINGS

LUMP SUM COST

Page 4 of 4

Page 95: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 1 of 56

SECTION 503

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section includes the furnishing of all materials and

equipment and the performing of all labor to complete all Basic Electrical

Requirements work as shown on the Contract Drawings and as herein specified or

directed by the ASPA Project Manager (Engineer). 1.02 INTENT

A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Contract Drawings to call for finished

work, tested and ready for operation. Wherever the word “Provide” is used, it

shall mean “Furnish and Install Complete and Ready for Use.”

Any apparatus, material or work not shown on the Contract Documents but

mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary

to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation even if

not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed by the

Contractor without additional expense to the Alabama State Port Authority (ASPA).

Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper

Complete and Functional Turnkey Installation and Operation, shall be included in the

work and in the Contractor’s Bid, the same as if herein specified or shown. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Part 2.08 “Shop Drawings”, of

this Section 26 00 00 of these Specifications.

B. Proposed Products List: Include shop drawings for all products specified.

C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.

D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

E. Submit As-Built Drawings clearly indicating locations of all Electrical, Lighting, and

Controls equipment installed prior to Project Close-Out.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The work and equipment shall comply with the following codes and standards:

1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), Latest Edition

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2

Page 96: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 2 of 56

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): All electrical equipment must be UL Labeled. 1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor is advised that codes or ordinances of local political subdivisions

do apply. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LIGHTING

A. Contractor shall provide and maintain construction power and lighting as required

to execute the work.

B. Contractor shall provide all secondary equipment, circuits, lights, lamps and

miscellaneous devices required to provide safe and practical, OSHA and NEC

complying light and power for construction purposes. 1.07 VISIT TO SITE

A. Contractor shall visit the site and shall include in the Bid all charges for any

special requirements of site. No extra charge shall be allowed for failure to

observe any difficulties, which may be encountered at job site, to install complete

and functional Electrical Lighting Systems. 1.08 MEASUREMENTS

A. Contractor s h a l l b a s e a l l m e a s u r e m e n t s b o t h h o r i z o n t a l a n d

v e r t i c a l f r o m established benchmarks. All work shall agree with these

established lines and levels. Contractor shall verify all measurements at site and

check the correctness as related to the work. Should the Contractor discover any

discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, which prevent

following good practice and the intent of the Contract Drawings and

Specifications, he shall notify the Engineer and shall not proceed with his work

until he has received instructions from the Engineer.

1.09 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and

work included in the Contract. Contractor shall follow drawings in laying out

work, check drawings of all trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed

and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where

headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Engineer shall be notified

before proceeding with installation. If directed by the Engineer the Contractor

shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed

to prevent conflict with work of various trades or for the proper execution of the

work.

Page 97: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 3 of 56

Where variances occur between t h e Contract Drawings and the

Specifications, or within either document itself, then the item or arrangement of

better quality, greater quantity, or higher cost shall be included in the Contract Bid

Price. The Engineer shall decide on the item and manner in which the work shall

be installed.

1.10 COOPERATION

A. Contractor shall require full cooperation between trades and shall furnish (in

writing, with copies to Engineer) any information necessary to permit the work of

all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or

delay. Where the work of one Subcontractor will be installed in close proximity

to work of other trades, or where there is evidence that the work of the one will

interfere with work of others, he shall assist in working out space conditions to

make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor

shall prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less

than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot 0 inches clearly showing how his work is to be

installed in relation to the work of other trades or so as not to cause any

interference with work of other trades, he shall make necessary changes in his

work to correct the condition without extra charge. 1.11 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall protect the work and material of all trades from damage by his

work or workmen and shall make good all damage thus caused. Contractor shall

be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and

accepted; protect work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store

materials and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. He

shall close open ends of work with temporary covers of plugs during construction

to prevent entry of obstructive material. 1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Work sequence can become very critical in renovation projects, particularly when

the ASPA and its Tenants occupy adjacent areas and existing distribution and

branch circuit systems are to be reused. The sequence of work under these

conditions is dependent on existing wiring configuration; inappropriate sequences

may be difficult and costly.

B. Construct work in accordance with Special Provisions and as specified elsewhere.

C. The ASPA and its Tenants shall be informed of the Installation Schedule to allow

access coordination and sufficient time for inspection without any work delay.

D. All work shall be coordinated with existing work, work by other trades, and

ongoing building operations.

Page 98: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 4 of 56

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional

heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction

debris, and traffic.

C. Handle items to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or to

work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been

damaged. Contractor shall be fully responsible for avoiding theft of equipment and

tools. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NEW AND UN-USED

A. All products for permanent construction shall be New and Un-Used.

B. Construction materials that are not installed shall b e removed i m m e d i a t e l y at

completion of Project construction work in each location to avoid conflict with

adjacent Port Operations. 2.02 APPROVALS

A. General: The materials, workmanship, design and arrangement of all work

installed under the Contract shall be subject to the approval of the ASPA PM

(Engineer). A Project Schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval

within 10 days after the date of Award of Contract and before the installation of

any proposed material or equipment. The Schedule shall include catalog cut

sheets, diagrams, drawings and such other descriptive data as may be required by

the Engineer and ASPA. Where specific manufacturers equipment or as

approved is referenced, it is intended to indicate the quality of equipment desired

and any product of equal quality which meets the requirements of these

Specifications and Drawings will be Reviewed and determined if acceptable by the

Engineer. In the opinion of the Engineer and ASPA, if any material or equipment

installed before Approval does not meet the intent of the Contract Drawings and

Specifications, the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement

at no additional cost to the ASPA.

B. Substitutions: Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other

than that specified or detailed on the Contract Drawings, which requires any

redesign of the structure, (piping, wiring, of any other part of the mechanical,

electrical or architectural layout) all such redesign and all new drawings and

detailing required shall, with the approval of the Engineer, be prepared by the

Contractor at his own expense. Where such approved deviation requires a

different quantity and arrangement of wiring, conduit, and equipment from that

specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, with the approval of the

Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such structural supports,

Page 99: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 5 of 56

mounts, controllers, electrical wiring, controls connections, and conduit and

any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to

the ASPA.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Each major component of equipment shall have as a minimum the manufacturer’s

name, address, catalog number, model, operating characteristics and style or type

on a plate securely and conspicuously attached to the item of equipment.

Nameplates for electrical apparatus shall conform to the referenced standards. 2.04 PREVENTION OF CORROSION

A. All metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Exposed metallic parts

shall be given a rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish by the manufacturer

that shall resist the salt atmosphere. Aluminum shall not be used in contact with

the earth and where connected to dissimilar metal shall be protected by approved

fittings and treatment. All parts such as boxes, bodies, fittings, guard posts and

guard post assemblies and miscellaneous parts made of ferrous metals but not of

corrosion-resistant steel, shall be zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A123 or

A153, except where other equivalent protective treatment is specifically approved

in writing by the Engineer. Steel conduits installed underground or under slabs on

grade shall be coated with an approved asphaltic paint or plastic tape (half-lapped).

Where pressure-sensitive plastic tape is used, the conduit shall be coated with a

primer recommended by the manufacturer before applying the tape. 2.05 SPARE-PARTS DATA

A. As soon as practicable after approval of materials and equipment and if possible,

not later than 30 days prior to the date of beneficial use, the Contractor shall

furnish the ASPA with Spare Parts Data for each different item of

equipment used. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,

with current unit prices and source of supply; a list of parts and supplies

that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of

equipment, or specified hereinafter to be furnished as part of the Contract and a list

of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient

operation for a period of 10 years after Project Final Acceptance. The

foregoing shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under the

Guarantee (Warranty) specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2.06 STANDARD PRODUCTS

A. Material and equipment shall be essentially the standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and shall meet

the requirements of the Specifications and essentially duplicate materials and

equipment that have been in satisfactory use as specified otherwise in the Lighting

Specifications.

Page 100: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 6 of 56

2.07 LISTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed, and before starting installation of any

materials or equipment, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a

complete list, in triplicate, of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the

work. This list shall include manufacturer’s style or catalog numbers. Cuts of

other descriptive data shall be furnished when required by the Engineer.

B. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time.

Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer’s published data; approval of

materials and equipment shall be tentative subject to submission of complete shop

drawings indicating compliance with the Contract Documents. 2.08 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. After receiving tentative approval of the equipment on the material lists before

installation of any of these items, the Contractor shall submit complete shop

drawings and such other descriptive data as the Engineer may require, in order to

demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawings submitted

prior to the “Listing of Materials and Equipment” approval will be returned

without action. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following items and

such other items as the Engineer may direct.

1. Light Fixtures

2. Wire & Cable

3. Conduit and Fittings

4. Circuit Breakers

5. Junction Boxes, Enclosures and Pull Boxes

6. Control Equipment

7. Fiber Optic Cable

8. Other Appurtenances

B. If departures from the Contract Documents are deemed necessary by the

Contractor, details of such departures, including changes in related portions of the

Project and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings.

Approved departures which require ASPA Project Manager Signed Approval shall

be made at no additional cost to the ASPA.

Page 101: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 7 of 56

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 CLEANING

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be re-

used.

B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of

equipment. Vacuum clean inside of cabinets.

C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished equipment, using finish

materials furnished by equipment manufacturer.

3.02 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be installed in location and manner that will allow for

convenient access for maintenance and inspection. 3.03 CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS

A. The Contractor shall rough-in and make final electrical connection to all pieces of

equipment requiring electrical connections. 3.04 SCAFFOLDING, LIFTING, RIGGING AND HOISTING

A. Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, l i f t i ng , rigging, hoisting and services

necessary for erection and delivery onto the premises of any equipment and shall

remove it from premises when no longer required. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Where cutting, channeling,

chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is

necessary for the proper installation, support, or anchorage of the conduit,

raceways, or other electrical work, this work shall be Prior Coordinated with

ASPA Project Manager and carefully done. Any damage to building, piping, or

equipment shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no

additional cost to the ASPA.

Page 102: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 8 of 57

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 V AND LESS)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work of this Section consists, in general, of furnishing all labor materials,

tools, equipment, and incidentals and doing all the work involved in the

installation of wires, cables, splices and terminations complete in place, as

specified in these specifications and as directed by the Engineer. 1.02 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

A. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

B. ASTM B 1 Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

C. ASTM B 2 Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

D. ASTM B 3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

E. ASTM B 8 C o n c e n t r i c -Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-

Hard, or Soft

F. ASTM B 33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

G. ASTM B 174 Bunch-Stranded Copper Conductors for Electrical Conductors

H. ASTM B 189 Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy-Coated Soft Copper Wire for

Electrical Purposes

I. ASTM D 2802 Ozone-Resistant, Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber Insulation for Wire

and Cable

J. ASTM D 3005 Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-

Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

K. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for specific Optical Density of Smoke

Generated by Solid

L. Federal Specifications for Materials

Page 103: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 9 of 56

M. HH-I-553 Insulation Tape, Electrical (Rubber, Natural and Synthetic)

N. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

O. ICEA S-19-81 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and

Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC 3)

P. ICEA S-61-402 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and

Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC 5)

Q. ICEA S-66-524 Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene- Insulated Wire and

Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC 7)

R. ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC 8)

S. ICEA T-33-655 Guide for Low Smoke, Halogen-Free (LSHF) Polymeric Cable

Jackets

T. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

U. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

V. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code; latest Edition

W. NFPA 780 Standard for Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2008

X. Naval Engineering Standards

Y. NES 713 Determination of Toxicity Index of Products of Combustion From

Small Specimens of Materials

Z. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

AA. UL 44 R u b b e r -Insulated Wires and Cables

BB. UL 62 F l e x i b l e Cord and Fixture Wire

CC. UL 83 T h e r m o p l a s t i c -Insulated Wires and Cables

DD. UL96A Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems

EE. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

FF. UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

GG. UL 854 Service-Entrance Cables

Page 104: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 10 of 56

HH. UL 1581 Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords

II.

UL 1685

Standards for Safety Vertical Tray Fire Propagation and Smoke

Release Test for Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following.

B. Catalog Cuts

1. Wires and cables for each type and size.

2. Splice kit materials and installation procedures. C.

Certified Shop Test Repots for Wires and Cables

D. Field t e s t r e su l t s fo r w i r es and cab le s , i nc l ud i n g M eg Ohm Meter

( Megger)

Readings with the test method used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Wires and cables which have been manufactured more than two years prior to

installation shall not be used in the Work of this Section.

B. Tapes for splices or terminations shall be dated by the tape manufacturer to

indicate that they have been manufactured no longer than six months prior to use

in the Work of this Section.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): PVC-insulated power wiring and items containing

PVC, except PVC-insulated wiring for communications systems, remote control,

signaling, and power-limited circuits, shall not be installed in indoor area. PVC-

insulated wiring for communications systems, remote control, signaling, and

power-limited circuits shall be furnished and installed in accordance with NFPA

70.

D. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. Single conductor wire or cable sizes #4/0 AWG and larger that are to be

installed in the same raceway shall be paralleled by the cable manufacturer

prior to shipment. Cable assembly overall diameter shall be kept to a

minimum.

2. Wire and cable sizes #4/0 AWG and larger shall be provided with factory-

applied caps unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. End seals

shall be heat-shrink, irradiated, modified polyolefin, and shall be sized for

Page 105: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 11 of 56

individual wires and cables.

3. Store material in a clean, dry space and protect it from the weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide wires, cables,

wire and cable splicing. 2.02 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General

1. Definitions

a. Wire shall be defined as a solid or stranded conductor smaller than

No. 6 AWG with or without insulation.

b. Cable shall be defined as a single conductor No. 6 AWG or larger, or

two or more conductors of any size wire under a common covering.

2. If locations, types, sizes and number of wires and cables are not shown on

the Contract Drawings or specified in the Contract Technical Specifications,

indicate and provide proper wire and cable selection to comply with this

section and NFPA 70 Standards.

3. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, solid conductors shall be

soft or annealed copper, conforming to ASTM B 33 (tinned), ASTM B

189 (lead-coated or lead-alloy coated), or ASTM B 3 (uncoated). Unless

otherwise specified in this Section or unless otherwise shown on the Contract

Drawings, stranded copper conductors shall be concentric stranding

conforming to ASTM B 8.

4. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, cable jackets for

interior use shall be low smoke, low toxicity, non-halogen, flame retardant

type and shall meet the following performance characteristics:

a. Cables shall pass the flame propagation and smoke release criteria according

to the test method of UL 1685. b. The halogen content of cable jackets shall not exceed 0.2 percent according

to the test method of MIL-C-24643. The Authority classifies 0.2 percent or

less halogen content as "non-halogen".

Page 106: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 12 of 56

c. The toxicity index of cable jackets shall not exceed 4.0 according to the test

method of NES 713. d. The cable jackets shall comply with ICEA T-33-655 for smoke

generation. e. The acid gas content of cable jackets shall not exceed a maximum of 3.0

percent according to the test method of MIL-C-24643.

5. Use the additional performance characteristics for wires and cables where

stringent flame retardancy, low smoke, low toxicity, zero halogen and

good circuit integrity during a fire are required.

a. Wires shall pass the flame propagation criteria according to the test method of

VW-1. b. The halogen content of both the wire and cable insulation and cable

jacket(s) shall not exceed 0.2 percent according to the test method of MIL-C-

24643. The Authority classifies 0.2 percent or less halogen content as "non-

halogen". c. The toxicity index of both the wire and cable insulation and cable jacket(s)

shall not exceed 2.0 according to the test method of NES 713. d. The acid gas content of both wire and cable insulation and cable jacket(s)

shall not exceed a maximum of 2.0 percent according to the test method of

MIL-C-24643. e. The wire and cable insulation materials shall pass the smoke

generation test in accordance with ASTM E 662. Wire and cable insulation

when tested on a specimen of 80 mils thick slab shall not exceed the

following values: Flaming Avg. Ds (4 minutes) 100

Flaming Avg. Dm (20 Minutes) 200 Non-Flaming Avg. Ds (4 minutes)

100 Non-Flaming Avg. Dm (20 minutes) 350 f. The cable jacket materials shall pass the smoke generation test in

accordance with ASTM E 662. Wire and cable jacket when tested on a

specimen of 80 mils thick slab shall not exceed the following values:

Flaming Avg. Ds (4 minutes) 50 Flaming Avg. Dm (20 minutes) 150 Non-

Flaming Avg. Ds (4 minutes) 50 Non-Flaming Avg. Dm (20 minutes) 250

6. Color Coding for Power and Lighting Conductors

a. Insulation or covering of wires and cables shall be factory color coded by

the use of colored compounds or coatings. The color code shall be

followed consistently throughout the performance of the Work.

Page 107: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 13 of 56

b.

Upon written request of the Contractor, the Engineer may permit the

use of the following methods in lieu of the wire or cable manufacturer's

color coding, when limited quantities of wire and cable are involved, for

sizes #8 AWG and larger.

1) For dry locations only, spiral application of 3/4 inch wide,

colored pressure sensitive plastic tape, half lapped for a distance

of not less than six inches may be used. To prevent unwinding,

the last two wraps of tape shall be applied with no tension.

2) For wet or dry locations, application of three, 3/16 inch

wide, colored, fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, self- locking,

nylon cable ties spaced 3 inches apart may be used. The

ties shall be snugly applied with a special tool or pliers, and any

excess removed.

3) Each wire and cable shall be color-coded at all terminal

points, in all manholes, boxes, or other similar enclosures.

4) Color markings shall be applied so as not to obliterate the

manufacturer's identification markings.

c.

Color code chart shall be as follows:

1) System Voltage

2) Conductor 208Y/120V, 240Y/120V

3) Phase A Black Brown

4) Phase B Red Orange

5) Phase C Blue Yellow

6) Neutral White Gray

7) Ground Green

7. All

UL

wires, cables, splices and terminations, for which there are established

Standards shall bear the UL label.

Page 108: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 14 of 56

B. General-Purpose Wires and Cables

1. General-purpose wires and cables shall be single conductor, ASTM B 8,

Class B stranded for sizes #8 AWG and larger, and solid for sizes #10

AWG and smaller.

2. Select from the following list of UL wire and cable types:

a. Type XHHW: Flame retarding, Cross-linked-polyolefin insulation,

conforming to UL 44, for dry locations only. b. Type XHHW-2: Flame retardant, Cross-linked-polyolefin

insulation, conforming to UL 44. c. Type THWN: Flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant

thermoplastic insulation with a nylon jacket or equivalent; double rated

THHN-THWN gasoline-oil resistant II; conforming to UL 83.

The use of this cable shall be in accordance with the

requirements of paragraph 1.03C of this Section.

C. Lighting Fixture Wires

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, lighting fixture wires

shall be stranded only, and shall be Type SF-2, silicone rubber insulated

conforming to UL 62.

D. Grounding Wires and Cables

Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, Grounding wires and Cables

shall be as follows:

1. Insulated

a. Solid for sizes #8 AWG and smaller; ASTM B 8, Class B stranded for

sizes #6 AWG and larger; and of the same insulation type as the power

conductors. b. Covering shall be a continuous green color and conform to ASTM B 33

and UL 44.

2. Non-insulated

a. General Solid for sizes #8 AWG and smaller; ASTM B 8, Class B

stranded for sizes #6 AWG and larger. b. In raceways Soft-drawn and conforming to ASTM B 3.

Page 109: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 15 of 56

c. Encased in concrete Soft-drawn, medium-hard-drawn, or hard- drawn

and conforming to ASTM B 1, B 2 or B 3, respectively.

E. Control Wires and Cables

Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, control wires and cables shall

be as follows:

1. Single conductor wires and cables shall be ASTM B 8, Class B stranded,

type XHHW or XHHW-2 flame retardant, cross-linked-polyolefin

insulation. Both shall conform to UL44 and ICEA S-66-524.

2. Multi-conductor cables shall be ASTM B 8, Class B or Class C stranded,

Control Cable Type B, conforming to ICEA S-61-402. Color-coded as per

ICEA S-61-402, Method No. 1 for NFPA 70 applications (with white and

green) or ICEA S-19-81, for paired conductor cables. Select from the

following list of cable types.

a. Individual ethylene-propylene rubber insulation with overall flame

retardant, cross-linked-polyolefin jacket; conforming to ICEA

S-68-516, UL 44, and UL 1581.

b. Individual e th ylene-propylene-rubber i nsu la t ion wi th

indiv idual and overall flame retardant, cross-linked polyolefin

jackets; conforming to ICEA S-68-516 and UL 44.

c. Individual flame retardant, cross-linked-polyolefin insulation with

and overall flame retardant, cross-linked-polyolefin jacket;

conforming to ICEA S-66-524.

d. Individual cross-linked-polyolefin insulation with

polyvinyl chloride jacket conforming to ICEA S-66-524.

overall

e.

Individual polyolefin insulation with individual and

polyvinyl chloride jackets conforming to ICEA S-61-402.

overall

F. Cable Tags

1. Dry Locations

a. Fiberglass tags, 1/16 inch thick and 3/4 inch wide, indented with

letters and numbers 5/16 inch high, with #14 AWG copper or

nylon, weather-resistant cable ties.

b. Lighting branch circuit wiring and single conductor signal and

control wiring may be identified with "Quiklabels" manufactured

by W. H. Brady Company, or approved equal.

Page 110: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 16 of 56

2. Wet Locations

a. Stainless s teel metal tags , No.28 gauge and 3/4 inch wide,

embossed with letters and numbers 5/16 inch high, with #14 AWG

copper or nylon, weather-resistant cable ties, or stainless steel

cable ties. 2.03 SPLICING, TERMINATING AND ARCPROOFING MATERIALS

A. General

1. All splicing, terminating and arc proofing materials shall be compatible so that

no one material will adversely affect the physical or electrical properties of

any other or of the wire or cable itself. 2. All materials for making splices and terminations shall be specifically

designed for use with the type of wire or cable, insulation and installation and

operating conditions of the specific application.

B. Connectors

Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide connectors of

the following types:

1. Solderless, non-insulated, high conductivity, corrosion resistant,

compression connectors conforming to UL 467 and IEEE 837;

2. Insulated, indenter type compression butt connectors;

3. Insulated, integral self-locking flexible shell, expandable spring

connectors;

4. Non-insulated, indenter type compression pigtail connectors;

5. Welded type connectors.

C. Terminals

Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide terminals of the

following types:

1. Solderless, non-insulated, high conductivity, corrosion resistant,

compression terminals conforming to UL 467 and IEEE 837;

2. Insulated, compression terminals;

Page 111: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 17 of 56

3. Solderless, high conductivity, corrosion resistant, hex screw type, bolted

terminals;

4. Welded type terminals.

D. Shrinkable Tubing

Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide shrinkable

tubing of the following types:

1. Either irradiated modified polyvinyl chloride or irradiated modified

polyolefin heat shrinkable tubing;

2. Cold shrinkable tubing.

E. Tapes and Sealers

1. Vinyl Tapes

a. Flame-retardant, cold and weather-resistant, 3/4 inch or 1 1/2 inches

wide, as required, and conforming to UL 510 and ASTM D3005.

1) For interior, dry locations, provide 7 mils, conforming to

ASTM D 3005 (Type I); Scotch (3M) No. 33, or approved

equal.

2) For exterior or damp and wet locations, provide 8.5 mils,

conforming to ASTM D 3005 (Type II); Scotch (3M) No.

88, or approved equal.

2. Rubber Tapes

a. Ethylene-propylene, rubber-based, 30-mil splicing tape, rated for

130 degrees C operation; 3/4 inch and wider (1, 1 1/2, 2 inches) or

approved by the Engineer, conforming to Federal Specification

HH-I-553 (Grade A); Scotch (3M) No. 130C, or approved equal.

3. Insulating Putty

a. Rubber-based, 125-mil elastic filler putty; 1 1/2 inches wide;

Scotch (3M) Scotchfil, or approved equal.

4. Silicone Rubber Tapes

5. Inorganic silicone rubber, 12-mil, 130 degrees C rated, anti-tracking, self-

fusing tape; 1 inch wide; Scotch (3M) No. 70, or approved equal.

Page 112: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 18 of 56

6. Sealer

a. Liquid applied fast-drying sealant; Scotch (3M) Scotchkote, or

approved equal.

F. Resin Filled Splices

1. Epoxy Molded Type

a. Two-piece, snap-together molded bodies, sized for wire or cable,

with two-part low viscosity polyurethane insulating and sealing

compound, rated for 600 volts, using crimp-type wire connector;

Scotch (3M) No. 82-A1, 82-A2 or 82-A3 compound, or approved

equal.

2. Re-Enterable Type

a. Transparent, molded bodies clamped with stainless steel strain-

relief bar and shield continuity connectors, sized for wire or cable, with

loosely woven polyester spacer web and jelly-like urethane formulation

for permanent re-entry capability; Scotch (3M) No. 78-R1 thru 78-

R5, with No. 2114 compound, or approved equal.

G. Arc Proofing Materials

1. Fire resistant tapes shall be Scotch (3M) No. 77, or approved equal.

2. Glass cloth binding tapes shall be Scotch (3M) No. 69, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to pulling wires and cables, clean raceway systems of all foreign matter and

perform all operations necessary so as not to cause damage to wires and cables while

pulling.

B. Prior to pulling wires and cables into underground conduit systems, place a

feeding tube approved by the Engineer at the entrance end of such systems. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Wire and Cable Installation

1. Keep wires and cables dry at all times.

Page 113: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 19 of 56

2. Seal wire and cable ends with watertight end seals if splicing or

terminating does not follow at once.

3. Before s p l i c i n g o r t e r m i n a t i n g w i r e s a n d c a b l e s , m a k e a

t h o r o u g h inspection to determine that water has not entered the wires and

cables or that the wires and cables have not been damaged.

4. Use adequate lubrication when installing cables in conduits or raceways.

Any pulling compounds shall be compatible with the finish of the wires and

cables furnished.

B. General Purpose Wires and Cables

1. Minimum wire or cable size shall be #12 AWG for light and power

service.

2. Wires or cables shall be at least #10 AWG for the entire length of branch

circuits, where distances to first outlets are as follows:

a. 100 feet or more on 480Y/277 Volt systems.

b. 70 feet or more on 208Y/120 Volt systems.

3. Lighting Fixture Wires

a. For wiring within lighting fixtures only, where sizes #14 AWG or

smaller are required, use Type SF-2 fixture hookup wire. Type SF-

2 wire shall not be used.

b. For connecting lighting fixtures to branch circuit conductors, use

Type RHH-VW-1, XHHW or USE, up to 90 degrees C, in dry

locations.

4. Grounding Wires and Cables

a. Use bare, non-insulated wire and cable only where approved by the

Engineer.

b. Insulated grounding cable shall be of the type specified in this

Section or as shown on the Contract Drawings.

5. Control Wires and Cables

a. Control wires and cables shall not be smaller than #14 AWG

unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

Page 114: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 20 of 56

C. Splicing and Terminating

1. General

a. In general, no splicing shall be performed without approval of the

Engineer. Splicing and terminating shall be as specified in this

Section. Details of special splicing and terminating shall be as shown

on the Contract Drawings. Any splicing or terminating methods other

than those specified below, for which the components a r e i n

a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s Section, shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2. General Purpose Wires and Cables

a. Splices in dry locations for sizes #10 AWG and smaller Splicing

shall be completed using one of the following:

1) Insulated, integral, self-locking flexible shell, expandable

spring connectors shall be applied to the twisted

conductors. Two, half-lapped layers of vinyl tape,

extending to a distance of not less than one inch from the

connector, shall be applied.

2) Compression t y p e , i n s u l a t e d b u t t c o n n e c t o r s

s h a l l b e applied to the butted conductors by means of an

appropriate crimping tool, providing controlled indentation.

Two, half- lapped layers of vinyl tape, extending to a distance

of not less than one inch from the connector, shall be applied.

3) Compression type, pigtail connectors shall be applied to the

conductors by means of an appropriate crimping tool,

providing controlled indentation. The connector shall be

covered with a polyamide cap and two, half-lapped layers

of vinyl tape, extending to a distance of not less than one inch

from the connector, shall be applied.

b. Splices in dry locations for sizes #8 AWG and larger Splicing shall be

completed using all of the following:

1) Connectors shall be split sleeve solderless type or

solderless compression type.

2) Fill indents of connectors with Scotchfil insulation putty.

3) Apply two, half-lapped layers of vinyl tape, or a shrinkable

tubing.

4) Apply rubber splicing tape equal to the original insulation

Page 115: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 21 of 56

c. Splices in wet locations.

1) Same as dry locations specified in 3.02 B.2.a and except that

after vinyl tape is applied, cover with two coats of sealer or

shrinkable tubing.

2) Resin-filled space shall be covered with two, half-lapped

layers of vinyl tape and two coats of sealer or shrinkable

tubing.

d. Terminations in dry locations for sizes #10 AWG and smaller

Terminations shall be compression terminals, insulated or non-

insulated.

e. Terminations in dry locations for sizes #8 AWG through #3/0 AWG

1) Ring tongue terminals shall be solderless, non-insulated

compression crimp type.

2) Ring tongue lugs shall be bolted hex screw type.

f. Terminations in dry locations for sizes #4/0 AWG and larger.1)

Ring tongue terminals shall be solderless, non-insulated

compression crimp type.

g. Terminations in wet locations In addition to the dry location

terminations specified in 3.02 B.2.d, 2.e and 2.f, cover the entire

termination area with two, half-lapped layers of vinyl tape and apply

two coats of sealer over the tape.

3. Lighting Fixture Wires

a. Connections to branch circuit and to fixture wiring shall be made

by either insulated, integral, self-locking flexible shell, expandable

spring, or crimp type connectors.

4. Grounding Wires and Cables

a. Splices and terminations shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

b. In hazardous or classified locations, splices and terminations shall

be solderless high conductivity, corrosion resistant, compression

type connectors and terminations shall be clamp type pressure

connectors, suitable for such use.

c. All underground connections shall be covered with two coats of

asphalt base paint.

Page 116: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 22 of 56

5. Control Wires and Cables

a. Splices s h a l l b e m a d e i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e

r e q u i r e m e n t s specified in 3.02 B.2.c and shall be enclosed in a re-

enterable splicing case. Where shielded cable is shown on the Contract

Drawings, the shielding shall be continued through the splice. Shields

shall be grounded at one location only unless otherwise shown on the

Contract Drawings.

b. Terminations shall be insulated, indenter type ring tongue

terminals.

D. Identification of Wires and Cables

1. Each wire and cable shall be identified by its circuit in all cabinets, boxes,

manholes, handholes, wireways and other enclosures and access locations, and

at all terminal points.

2. The circuit designations and tags shall be attached to wires and cables in

such a manner as to be readily visible.

3. The tag ties shall be wrapped around all conductors comprising the circuit or

feeder to be identified.

4. Wires and cables which are arc proofed shall also be identified outside the

applied arc proofing. 3.03 FIELD TESTS

A. Test all wires and cables up to equipment installed under this Contract with a

1000-volt MegOhmMeter (Megger). Furnish the Engineer with a copy of the

Megger readings together with an outline of the method used. If, in the opinion of

the Engineer, any reading is lower than that required by applicable codes,

promptly replace the materials involved, at the Contractor's expense, and retest.

Page 117: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 23 of 56

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work of this Section consists, in general, of furnishing all labor materials,

tools, equipment, and incidentals and doing all the work involved in installing

grounding systems. 1.02 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

B. ANSI C 2 National Electrical Safety Code

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

D. IEEE Std 142-2008 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems

E. IEEE Std 1100-2008 R e c o m m e n d e d Practice for Powering and

Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment

F. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) G.GG

G. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, Latest Edition.

H. NFPA 780, Standard for Installation of Lighting Protection Systems

I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

J. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

K. UL 96A Installation Requirements for Lighting Protection Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1. Manufacturer’s Data

a. Catalog Cuts for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and

grounding fittings.

2. Testing

Page 118: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 24 of 56

a. Ground Resistance Test Results.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, National Electric Code,

Latest Edition.

B. Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms

"listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in NFPA 70 Article 100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Furnish grounding elements for, transformers, cabinets, panelboards, and miscellaneous

electrical equipment, for all noncurrent-carrying metallic portions of the entire

electrical system and for exposed non-electrical required by

ANSI C2, NFPA 70, and applicable building codes. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, provide grounding

products of manufacturers. 2.03 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract

Drawings, the rods shall be 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long. Minimum length as

required. 2.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Provide grounding conductors in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, as

applicable, and as specified on the Contract Drawings.

B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated and provided in all

circuits. Grounding by use of raceway shall Not be permitted.

C. Isolated grounding conductors shall be green insulated with yellow striping.

2.05 ABOVE GRADE CONNECTIONS

A. Connectors to piping, fencing, and conduit systems shall be listed and labeled as

grounding connectors for the materials used. 2.06 BELOW GRADE CONNECTIONS

Page 119: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 25 of 56

A. Buried Cable and ground rod connections shall be exothermic welds. Welded

connections shall be provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and

combinations of conductors shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.07 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Grounding Bushing shall be insulated type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General

Install grounding elements for transformers, cabinets, panelboards and miscellaneous

electrical equipment, for all metallic non-current carrying portions of the entire electrical

system and for exposed non-electrical systems as required by ANSI C 2, NFPA 70 and

building codes which would be applicable, if the Authority were a private corporation.

1. Grounding and bonding equipment for use in connection with interior wiring

systems shall conform to UL 467.

2. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit

conductors to maintain grounding system at equipotential. Raceway system shall

not be utilized as the equipment ground.

3. Ground all noncurrent-carrying metallic enclosures of electrical conductors, or

exposed noncurrent-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, or of power

apparatus.

4. Connections:

a. General

1) Make connections in such a matter as to minimize possibility of

galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware,

conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be

galvanically compatible.

2) Use e l e c t r o p l a t e d o r h o t -tin-coated m a t e r i a l s t o

a s s u r e h i g h conductivity and make contact points closer in order

of galvanic series.

Page 120: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 26 of 56

3) Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

4) Make all connections of grounding connector cables to ground

rods by exothermic welding method. Welds that are puffed up, or that

show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

5) Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and

branch circuits with pressure-type grounding lugs. Where metallic

raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and

electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a

grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding

conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically non-

continuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding

bushings and bare grounding conductors.

6) Tighten grounding and bonding conductors and terminals,

including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's

published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.

7) Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground

rods, or ground buses, insulate the entire area of the connection and

seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.

B. Grounding

1. All ground rods in grounding loops shall have less than 5 ohms resistance to

ground. All individual ground rods shall have a maximum of 25 ohms

resistance to ground. 3.02 FIELD TESTS

A. Make ground resistance tests at all ground rods to verify that grounding system is at

equipotential and to ensure compliance with the requirements specified, in 3.01 above,

in the presence of the Engineer, and prepare all test results in tabulated form

indicating location and time of each test and soil resistivity measured. If ground

resistance on a grounding resistance test is higher than the value specified, either

increase the length of the rod or add more rods to the grounding system until the

required ground resistance is achieved.

Page 121: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 27 of 56

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work of this Section consists, in general, of furnishing all labor materials,

tools, equipment, and incidentals and doing all the work involved in the

installation of supporting devices complete in place as specified in these

specifications and RFP and as directed by the Engineer.

B. Weatherproof Cast boxes with RGS Conduit shall be used for Modifications to

Existing High Bay Light Fixture Mounting Assemblies to extend existing

pendant mounts to Match Existing Fixtures’ Mounting Height to Face of Fixture

and to maintain Structural Integrity. These Boxes and Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast-steel and shall be

threaded conduit entrance type. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC)

B. AISC Manual of Steel Construction

C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

D. Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

F. ASTM A 36 Structural Steel American Welding Society (AWS)

G. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Steel

H. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

I. NECA 5055 Standard of Installation

J. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

K. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, Latest Edition

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following.

1. Catalog Cuts

a. Hanger and supports for each type.

Page 122: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 28 of 56

b. Sealing materials for each type.

c. Fasteners for each type.

c. Existing Mount Modifications Detail Drawing and Components

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Supporting devices, of types and sizes required, shall have been satisfactory used

for purposes similar to those intended herein for not less than three years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, protective packaging.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry space and protect them from weather.

C. Handle in a manner to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

D. Where possible, maintain protective coverings until installation is complete and

remove such coverings as part of final cleanup.

E. Touch up damage to finishes to match adjacent surfaces, including re-coating of

galvanized or plated surfaces where damaged, cut or drilled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide supporting devices subject to compliance with requirements of

this Section. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. General

a. Unless o t h e r w i s e s h o w n o n t h e C o n t r a c t D r a w i n g s ,

p r o v i d e hangers and supports as specified below.

b. Where more than one type of hanger or support is suitable for the

intended use, selection is at the Contractor's option, subject to approval

by the Engineer.

c. Hangers and supports, for which there are established Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. (UL) standards, shall bear the UL label.

2. Raceway Support

Page 123: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 29 of 56

a. Clevis Hangers

1) For supporting horizontal conduit; galvanized steel; with

hole for threaded steel rod.

b. Riser Clamps

1) For supporting vertical conduits; galvanized steel; with two or

three bolts and nuts, and 4-inch ears.

c. Reducing Couplings

1) Steel rod reducing coupling; size as required; galvanized or

plated steel

d. C-Clamps

1) Black malleable iron or galvanized or plated steel; with

hole for threaded rod.

e. I - Beam Clamps

1) Galvanized or plated steel, 1 1/4-inch x 3/16-inch stock;

3/8-inch cross bolt; 2-inch flange width

f. Right Angle or Parallel beam Clamps

1) Galvanized steel clamps for supporting or fastening conduit up

to 2-inch trade size

g. One-Hole Conduit Straps

1) For supporting up to 1-inch conduit or electrical metallic

tubing (EMT); galvanized steel

h. Two-Hole Conduit straps for supporting conduit or EMT larger

than 1-inch galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width.

i. Hexagon Nuts: galvanized steel

j. Round Steel Rod: galvanized or plated steel; threaded

k. The following types of hangers and supports shall not be used:

1) Perforated metal strapping;

2) Slotted, perforated angles;

3) Spring pressure or torsion clips, hangers or supports.

Page 124: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 30 of 56

3. Equipment Supports

a. U-channel strut system shall be 12-gauge, hot-dipped galvanized

steel. Provide with drilled or slotted holes as required for the application

and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel:

1) Fixture hangers

2) Channel hangers

3) End caps

4) Beam clamps

5) Wiring stud

6) Thin wall conduit clamps

7) Rigid conduit clamps

8) Conduit hangers

9) U-bolts

4. Supporting Steel Sections and Channels

a. Supporting steel sections and channels shall be fabricated of

ASTM A 36 steel in accordance with the appropriate requirements of

the AISC, AISI, and AWS publications specified in 1.02, and shall be

hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

5. Cable Supports

a. Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-

armored type electrical cables in risers. Assembly shall include body of

galvanized malleable iron with insulating wedging plug.

b. Provide cable supports for armored type electrical cables in risers.

Assembly shall include body and pressure plates of galvanized steel.

B. SLEEVES AND SEALS

1. General

a. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, provide sleeves and

seals as specified below.

b. Where more than one type of sleeve or seal is suitable for the

intended use, selection is at the Contractor's option, subject to

Page 125: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 31 of 56

approval by the Engineer.

c. Sleeves and seals, for which there are established UL standard,

shall bear the UL label.

2. Pipe Sleeves

a. Provide pipe sleeves for conduits penetrating concrete or masonry

floor and walls, as follows:

1) Steel Pipe

(a) Fabricate galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.

2) Iron Pipe

(a) Fabricate from cast iron or ductile iron pipe; remove

burrs.

3) Plastic Pipe

(a) Fabricate from either fiberglass or Schedule 40,

PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. Fiberglass sleeves may

be utilized for interior or exterior usages, but PVC

sleeves shall be utilized for exterior usage only.

b. Sleeves shall have a minimum inside diameter as shown below,

based on the installed raceway diameter.

1) Raceway Diam. Sleeve Inside Diam. (Inches)______ (Inches)__________

1 or less 2

1 1/4 -2 3

2 1/2 -3 4

3.5 -4 5

5 6

c. Where a sleeve encloses only one conductor, phase or polarity, or a

ground wire or cable, the sleeve shall be non-ferrous.

3. Interlocking Modular Seals.

a. Provide interlocking modular type seals for conduit access located in

exterior foundation and pit walls. The seals shall be multi-link stainless

steel bolted connection, high- temperature fittings.

Page 126: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 32 of 56

a. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, provide

fasteners as specified below.

b.

Where more than one type of fasteners is suitable for the intended

use, selection is at the Contractor's option, subject to approval by

the Engineer.

2.

Toggle

Bolts

a.

Toggle bolts shall be spring head, galvanized or plated steel, 1/4-

inch to 1/2-inch sizes, length as required.

4. Sealing Bushings

a. Provide sealing bushings for conduit access core-drilled through

foundation walls or floors. The bushings shall be molded; one- piece

neoprene sealing rings with PVC coated steel or uncoated aluminum

pressure plates, stainless steel hex socket head cap screws and flat

washers.

5. Fire Seals.

a. Provide UL listed, 3 hour rating, silicone based foam, and fire resistive,

waterproof joint sealing system to prevent the passage of hot gases and

fire.

6. Wall and Floor Seals

a. Provide watertight and pressure-tight wall and floor seals suitable for

sealing around conduit passing through exterior concrete floors and

walls. Assembly shall include steel sleeves, galvanized malleable iron

body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings,

membrane clamp were required by foundation design and pressure

clamps with type 316 stainless steel hex head cap screws. Seal sizes

shall be maximum published size for conduit to be installed therein.

C. FASTENERS

1. General

3. Expansion Anchors

a. Expansion anchors shall be metallic expansion anchors or shields,

including drop-in anchors, wedge and sleeve anchors, and two- piece and

three-piece shields for lag screws or machine screws or bolts.

Page 127: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 33 of 56

4. Powder activated Fasteners

a. Powder activated fasteners shall be steel, pin or stud type, selected for

proper length and penetration for the equipment, clamp or strap to be

installed, and the base material.

5. Bolts, Nuts, Lock Washers and Washers

a. All hardware shall be galvanized or plated steel, unless otherwise

shown on the Contract Drawings.

b. Bolts and nuts, 1/4-inch trade size and larger, shall be hex head or hex

socket type, standard American sizes.

c. Lock washers shall match the finish of the furnished bolts and nuts, and

generally be installed one-per-bolt, at the nut end of the assembly.

d. Washers shall be standard or fender type, as required, and sized to

match the installed bolts or screws.

6. The following types of fasteners shall Not be used:

a. Lead anchors or studs;

b. Wooden plugs or anchors;

c. Plastic anchors;

d. "Nail-in" anchors, either of plastic or metal type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that electrical installations, structural, mechanical and other related Work

satisfy the requirements for performance of the Work of this Section in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Report immediately to the Engineer any electrical, structural or related

construction defects in areas where supporting devices are to be installed, and do not

attempt to rectify any defect unless specifically instructed to do so by the Engineer.

Page 128: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 34 of 56

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Before installation of supporting devices, the Contractor shall investigate the site

condition to determine, what preparatory work, if any, will be needed. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install hangers and supports, sleeves and fasteners in accordance with

approved printed manufacturer's installation procedures, and as specified.

2. Coordinate all affected trades and all aspects of the electrical work,

including installation of raceways and wiring as necessary to interface

installation of supporting devices with other work.

3. Install hangers and supports, and attachments to properly support raceways,

equipment and accessories from building structure. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze

hangers where possible. Install hangers and supports with maximum spacing

not to exceed that permitted by NFPA 70 and NECA 5055, as applicable, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

4. Secure threaded rod couplings, trapeze hangers or supports or similar

horizontal elements, using lock washers and jam nuts to prevent loosening.

B. Conduit and Raceway supports

1. Do not support raceways from hung ceiling supports or members, or metal roof

deck.

2. Do not support raceways from mechanical ductwork, ductwork supports,

piping or piping supports.

3. Threaded rod for the support of conduits, raceways or trapeze hangers of the

given size, shall be not less than the following:

a. Conduit, Raceway, Threaded Rod

Hanger Size Size

(Inches) (Inches)

2 or less 3/8

2 1/2 - 3 ½ 1/2

4-5 5/8

6 3/4

Page 129: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 35 of 56

4. Where trapeze hangers are used, bolt or clamp the raceways in place to at

least every third hanger and to the first hanger on each side of a bend, fitting,

junction or pull box or change in direction.

C. Sleeves

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, extend sleeves for

raceways and risers one inch beyond top of finished floor, curb or building

element being penetrated.

2. Install sleeves level and plumb, accurately located and positioned to

conform to the requirements of the equipment and in accordance with the

approved layout drawings.

3. Install interlocking modular seals in tandem, one at the interior and one at the

exterior face of the pipe sleeve.

4. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form

watertight seal.

D. Fasteners

1. Wood screws, lag screws, carriage bolts or machine screws shall be

utilized for wood or materials of similar fibrous nature.

2. Welded or blazed threaded studs, bolts or machine screws or clamps shall be

utilized for structural and miscellaneous steel, iron or other metals.

3. Metallic expansion shields, wedge anchors or drop-in anchors, with lag

screws, bolts or machine screws shall be utilized for solid masonry or concrete.

4. Sleeve anchors, drop-in anchors or toggle bolts shall be utilized for

concrete masonry units (CMU). Do not use powder activated fasteners in CMU.

E. Dissimilar Metals

1. "Dissimilar metals" shall mean those metals which are incompatible with one

another in the presence of moisture, as determined from their relative

positions in the Electrochemical Series, or from test data.

2. Where dissimilar metals come in contact, paint the joint both inside and out

with approved coating to exclude moisture from the joint, or provide a

suitable insulating barrier separating the metals.

Page 130: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 36 of 56

CONDUIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work of this Section consists, in general, of furnishing all labor materials,

tools, equipment, and incidentals and doing all the work involved in constructing

underground conduit systems complete in place, including final cleaning as

indicated on the plans, as specified in these specifications and as directed by the

Engineer. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C 2 National Electrical Safety Code

B. ANSI C 80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated

C. ASTM A 185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

D. NEMA RN 1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid

Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

E. NEMA TC 2 Electric Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80)

F. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Latest Edition

G. Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

H. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

I. UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit

J. UL 514B Fittings for Conduits and Outlet Boxes

K. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment

L. UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conduit: A single enclosed raceway for wires or cables; duct.

B. Duct Bank: A structure containing one or more ducts or conduits.

C. Conduit System: A combination of conduit, conduits, manholes, handholes, and

vaults joined to form an integrated whole.

Page 131: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 37 of 56

1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The underground conduit system shall be furnished and installed in accordance

with this section and as specified on the Contract Drawings.

B. Components of the underground conduit system manufactured, supplied, and

installed shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70, all local codes, and the

requirements of OSHA. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00. Submit the following:

B. Catalog Cuts

1. Conduit

2. Racking assemblies

3. Grounding assemblies

4. Continuous inserts

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The manufacturer shall have had a minimum of three years experience within the last

five years in manufacturing the products of the type(s) and size(s) described in this

Section. Those products shall have been satisfactorily used for purposes similar t o

t h o s e i n t e n d e d h e r e i n . The Contractor shall provide a list of

installations and contracts for which the manufacturer has produced such

materials.

B. All electrical materials and equipment, for which there is a nationally recognized

standard, shall bear the conformance label of the nationally recognized third party

inspection authority, such as Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual

(FM), or ETL. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, protective packaging.

Protective caps shall be removed immediately prior to installation of conduit.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry space and protect them from weather.

C. Handle in a manner to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

Page 132: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 38 of 56

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General

1. Location, types and sizes of conduits and conduit systems as required by

Contract Documents.

2. Conduits shall b e s u p p l i e d i n s t a n d a r d l e n g t h s i n a c c o r d a n c e

w i t h applicable UL standards.

3. EMT shall Not be used.

B. Rigid Metal Conduit

1. RGS - Galvanized s t e e l c o n d u i t ( heavy-wall) s h a l l b e h o t

d i p p e d galvanized after cutting and threading and shall conform to UL

6 and ANSI C 80.1.

2. All preformed elbows shall be similar in construction to, and of a type

designed for use with the appropriate conduit and shall conform to UL 6.

3. All fittings shall be threaded.

C. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

1. Shall Not be Used.

D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Interlocked Armored)

Type Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit, LFMC designed, manufactured, and

tested for use in accordance with the NEC, Article 350 and UL 360. LFMC shall

be Galvanized Steel Armored and Interlocked type.

Page 133: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 39 of 56

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all conduit, equipment and accessories prior to installation. Replace any

damaged items.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of dimensions and

existing underground utilities.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All above ground conduits shall be hot dipped Galvanized Rigid Steel per

ASPA Standards and UL Approved.

2. Underground conduit systems shall be installed in accordance with the

requirements of ANSI C 2, NFPA 70 and as required by the Contract

Drawings.

B. Excavation and Backfill

1. Excavation and backfill for underground conduits, handholes, and

manholes shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section

31 23 16, "Excavation” and 31 23 23 “Fill” of these Specifications.

C. Concrete Encased Conduit

1. Concrete encasement of conduit shall conform to the requirements of the

Contract Drawings (if applicable) and the requirements of Section 03 3000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" of these Specifications.

2. The stubbed out conduit shall be per Trade Standards.

3. No variation from a straight line of greater than 1/2 inch in fifty feet will be

permitted when installing a concrete encased conduit.

4. Reinforce junctions with existing concrete encased conduit, or existing

systems, with W8 x W4 - 10 x 10 welded wire fabrics, conforming to ASTM A

185, encased in four inches additional thickness of concrete around each set of

conduits. The additional encasement shall extend at least four feet in each

direction from the junction.

5. Where the placing of concrete is interrupted for one hour or more,

reinforce the concrete encasement at the point of interruption with W4 x W4 –

Page 134: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 40 of 56

10 x 10 welded wire fabric, conforming to ASTM A 185, in the manner

specified.

6. Preformed or precast conduit may be substituted for the field-encased

type, subject to the approval of the Engineer. All precast conduit shall meet

the same requirements specified herein or shown on the Contract Drawings.

7. All conduits shall leave or enter structures perpendicularly.

8. Changes in direction of conduits shall be made by bends having a

minimum radius of 15 feet. Elbows or sweeps to equipment or

foundations shall have a radius not less than 10 times the trade diameter of

The conduit.

9. Conduits shall be installed in true alignment and shall be sloped for

drainage toward manholes or handholes. All free ends of empty conduits shall

be sealed to prevent water entrance.

10. Openings for conduits in manhole construction shall be sealed and made

watertight in an approved manner.

11. Transitions between conduits of different materials shall be made using the

manufacturer's standard adapters.

12. Terminations of rigid nonmetallic conduits in manholes, handholes, and

other concrete structures, shall be made with end bells, set flush with the

inside face of the concrete.

13. Terminations of rigid metal conduits in manholes, handholes, vaults and

other concrete structures, shall be made with insulated grounding

bushings, projecting 2 inches beyond the inside face of the concrete.

D. Testing

1. Test conduits in the presence of the ASPA’s Representative, by pulling

through each conduit a flexible cylindrical mandrel having an outside diameter

no more than ¼ inch smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit, but

nominally 85 percent of the trade diameter, whichever is larger. Only nylon

cable of adequate strength shall be used to pull the mandrel through the

conduit system. The use of rope will not be permitted.

E. Connections to Existing Conduits

1. Where conduits installed under this Contract are connected to existing

conduits, test the entire run to the nearest box, manhole, handhole, vault or

equipment enclosure, including all existing conduits installed by others that

will be used under this Contract.

Page 135: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 41 of 56

2. Where any work shall be performed in conduits emanating from a

manhole, handhole, vault or equipment enclosure, all existing spare conduits

(conduits containing no electric wire or cable) shall be tested to the nearest

manhole, handhole, vault or equipment and a pull line shall be left in place in

each such conduit.

3. Report immediately to the Engineer any defect or stoppage found in

portions of the existing conduit system not installed under this Contract. Do not

attempt to rectify any defect or stoppage found in conduit not installed under

this Contract unless specifically instructed to do so by the Engineer. The

Contractor’s compensation for the rectifying of such defects or stoppages at the

direction of the Engineer will be determined in accordance with the clause of

the Contract providing compensation for Extra Work.

4. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether a defect or stoppage

exists. Perform all tests required by the Engineer to enable him to make his

decision. 3.04 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Conduit Cleaning

1. After installation of conduits, manholes, handholes, vaults, accessories and

completion of all concreting operations, if any, carefully clean and clear all

conduits of all obstructions and foreign matter to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

Page 136: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 42 of 56

BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work of this Section consists, in general, of furnishing all labor materials,

tools, equipment, and incidentals and doing all the work involved in the

installation of boxes and fittings complete in place, as indicated on the plans, as

specified in these specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

1. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section are:

a. Outlet Boxes

b. Device Boxes

c. Pull Boxes

d. Junction Boxes

e. Conduit Bodies

f. Fittings

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NEMA OS1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports

B.

NEMA 250

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

C.

NFPA 70

National Electrical Code, (2017)

D.

UL 50

Cabinets and Boxes

E.

UL 514A

Metallic Outlet Boxes

F.

UL 514B

Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

G.

UL 514C

Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes, and Covers

H.

UL 886

Locations

Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified)

Page 137: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 43 of 56

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1. Catalog Cuts

a. All boxes and fittings.

2. Shop Drawings

a. Special boxes

b. Boxes larger than 12 inches

c. Ancillary equipment if shown on the Contract Drawings 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Boxes and fittings, of types and sizes required, shall have been satisfactorily used for

purposes similar to those intended herein for not less than three years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original, unopened, protective packaging.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry space and protect them from weather.

C. Handle in a manner to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

D. Where possible, maintain protective coverings until installation is complete and

remove such coverings as part of final cleanup.

E. Touch up any damage to finishes to match adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General

1. Locations, types and sizes of boxes and fittings are shown on the Contract

Drawings.

2. Boxes and fittings shall be metallic, unless otherwise indicated on the and

shall conform to NEMA 0S1, NEMA 250, UL 50, UL 514A, UL 514B, and

NFPA 70.

3. All electrical materials and equipment, for which there are established UL

standards, shall bear the UL label.

4. Where the sizes or dimensions of a box are not shown indicated, all boxes,

Page 138: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 44 of 56

whether for use on power, communications, signaling, control, telephone, or

other purposes, shall be sized as follows:

a. In straight pulls, the length of the box shall not be less than 8 times the

trade diameter (nominal inside diameter) of the largest raceway.

b. Where angle or "U" pulls are made, the distance between each

raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box shall not

be less than 6 times the trade diameter of the largest raceway. The

distance shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the

sum of the diameters of all other raceway entries in any row on the

same wall of the box. The distance between raceway entries enclosing

the same conductor shall not be less than 6 times the trade diameter of

the larger raceway.

c. Where a conduit entry is in the wall of a box opposite a removable

cover, the minimum distance between the entry and the cover shall be

as follows:

Conduit Size Distance between Entry and Cover

Up to 1 1/4" 4"

1 1/4" and 1 1/2" 6"

2" and 2 1/2" 8"

3" and larger 12"

d. The minimum depth of a box shall be not less than two times the

trade diameter of the conduit entries in a single row and not less

than 1 1/2 times the sum of the trade diameter of the largest

raceway in each row for multiple rows.

5. Weatherproof Cast boxes shall be used for Exterior, Damp/Wet Locations, and

for Modifications to Existing Light Fixture Mounting Assemblies.

a. Weatherproof boxes shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast-steel. Cast

boxes shall be threaded conduit entrance type provided with mounting

lugs. Materials shall match the type of galvanized steel conduit used in

the conduit run.

6. Cover plates for outlet boxes are specified in Section 26 0570, "Wiring

Devices" of the specifications.

Page 139: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 45 of 56

B. Interior Outlet and Device Boxes

1. Provide galvanized, flat-rolled, sheet-steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of

types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location

and installation; construct boxes with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and

with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box

covers and wiring devices.

2. Outlet boxes shall be of proper sizes and shapes for conduits and wires

entering them, and equipped with plaster ring or cover as necessary for the

wiring devices to be installed.

3. Surface mounted boxes shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast-steel or cast

aluminum. Materials shall match type of conduit.

4. Boxes for switches and receptacles shall be 4-inch square, minimum 2 1/8- inch

deep, for up to two devices; solid, ganged boxes for over two devices; and

installed so that device covers shall be tight and plumb with wall finish.

5. Provide suitable barrier in boxes where two or more 277-volt switches are to

be installed, to isolate each on its own phase.

6. Boxes for lighting fixture installation shall be 4-inch square, minimum 2

1/8- inch deep, and provided with 3/8-inch studs.

7. Boxes to be installed in ceilings, plenums, or spaces used for supply or

return of environmental air shall be UL listed for such use, without holes,

openings or penetrations, and complete with gasketed cover plates.

8. Provide all sheet-steel boxes with suitable knockouts.

C. Exterior Outlet, Device Boxes, and Enclosures

1. Provide corrosion-resistant, cast-metal, weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of

types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location

and installation.

2. For outlet boxes to be installed flush or recessed in exterior walls, provide

galvanized, sheet-steel boxes, with suitable depth and tile, plaster or masonry

rings for the wall construction.

3. Provide cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged, waterproof caps suitably

configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and stainless steel

or brass screws or fasteners. Face plate material shall match the type box i.e,

galvanized steel or aluminum.

D. Exterior Enclosures shall be stainless steel pad lockable NEMA 4X Type.

Page 140: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 46 of 56

E. Junction and Pull Boxes

1. General

a. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, provide

galvanized, code-gauge, sheet-steel junction and pull boxes and covers

for interior locations and stainless steel metal boxes and covers for

exterior locations of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective

location and installation, and equipped with stainless steel hinges, nuts,

bolts, screws and washers.

b. Junction or pull boxes having any dimension larger than 36 inches

shall contain racks or supports for all cables or conductors.

c. Provide pull boxes with suitable insulating barriers required by

code. Vertical-offset pull boxes shall contain cable supports at turns to

prevent cables from resting on corners.

d. Provide boxes with provisions for padlocking where required.

e. Special boxes shall be as indicated or required.

f. Catches or vault handles shall be lockable. Locks shall be keyed alike

for the same service, such as power, communications, signal or

telephone. Each service type shall be keyed differently.

g. All covers in exposed exterior locations, or other area shall be

gasketed.

h. For covers heavier than 20 pounds or more than 24 inches in any

dimension, provide two replaceable studs, located on each side of the

box flange, to support the cover during installation.

i. Boxes containing, or designated for, conductors operating at greater than

600 volts (phase-to-phase) shall be constructed of minimum 12-gauge

Steel.

j. Interior Junction and Pull Boxes

1) Junction and pull boxes shall be furnished with screw-on

covers for boxes having any cover dimension 24 inches or

less, and with either single or multiple- section hinged

covers for boxes having any cover dimension larger than 24

inches.

k. Exterior Junction and Pull Boxes

1) Junction and pull boxes shall be furnished with gasketed

screw-on covers for boxes having any cover dimension 24

Page 141: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 47 of 56

inches or less, and with gasketed hinged, bolt-on covers for

boxes having any cover dimension larger than 24 inches.

l. Precast Concrete Pull Boxes

1) Precast equipment shall use Concrete in accordance with

the requirements of these Specifications.

2) Cast-in-place equipment shall be Concrete in accordance

with the requirements of the section titled, “Cast-in-Place

Concrete” of these Specifications.

3) Frames and covers shall be as shown on the Contract

Drawings.

2. Conduit Bodies

a. Provide galvanized, cast-metal, conduit bodies, of types, shapes

and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; construct

with threaded-conduit entrance hubs, removable covers, and

stainless steel or brass screws.

3. Bushings, Locknuts and Knockout Closures

a. Provide corrosion-resistant knockout closures and conduit

locknuts, a n d i n s u l a t e d , m a l l e a b l e -iron, c o n d u i t

b u s h i n g s a n d offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit each

respective use and installation.

4. Supporting Devices

a. Provide inserts, expansion shield lugs, bolts with nuts and washers,

shims or any other type of fastening devices required to secure

boxes, in accordance with the Section 26 0529 entitled

"HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS".

Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, all fasteners

shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel, and of sizes and

types recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as

approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes and conduit bodies at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings

and as required by NFPA 70 at any other location where they are required to

facilitate the pulling, supporting or connection of wires and cables.

B. Securely mount all boxes in a manner approved by the Engineer and support the

Page 142: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 48 of 56

boxes independently of conduits entering them.

C. Paint exteriors of boxes exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in electrical

rooms or closets or spaces shown as "unfinished" on the Contract Drawings, and

the exteriors of boxes installed above hung or accessible ceilings, as follows:

1. High Voltage

a. Red with 1-inch, white block letters reading "HIGH VOLTAGE" on

each exposed face and cover.

b. All installations shall conform to NFPA 70.

D. Dissimilar Metals

1. "Dissimilar metals" shall mean those metals which are incompatible with

one another in the presence of moisture, as determined from their relative

positions in the Electrochemical Series, or from test data.

2. Where dissimilar metals come in contact, paint the joint both inside and

out with approved coating to exclude moisture from the joint, or provide a

suitable insulating barrier separating the metals.

Page 143: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 49 of 56

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section includes the furnishing of all materials and

equipment and the performing of all labor to complete Electrical Identification of

electrical system as shown on the Contract Drawings and as herein specified or

directed by the Engineer.

B. This work shall include but is not limited to:

1. Nameplates and labels.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 0000 Basic Electrical Requirements

1.03 REFERENCES

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of these

Specifications.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,

and installation of Product.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70: NEC Latest Edition.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.

Page 144: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 50 of 56

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved t h r e e -layer U V r e s i s t a n t , w e a t h e r p r o o f ,

l a m i n a t e d micarta, black letters on white background.

B. Locations:

1. Each electrical equipment enclosure.

C. Letter Size:

1. 1/8-inch letters for identifying individual equipment.

2. 1/4-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment.

2.02 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Permanent markers with machined lettering.

B. Locations: Each conductor and conduit at panel board gutters, pull boxes,

outlet and junction boxes, and each equipment enclosure.

C. Legend

1. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings and

Laminated Copy inside front cover of equipment enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplate parallel to grade or floor.

B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using SS screws and expoxy.

Page 145: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Electrical Specifications Page 51 of 56

PART 4 - COMPENSATION

4.01 MEASUREMENT

A. Electrical Identification shall be verified by Inspection by ASAP Project Manager.

4.02 PAYMENT

A. Payment for Electrical Identification, complete in place, shall be taken to be

included in and covered by the Lump Sum or Unit Prices Bid for the respective

items requiring Electrical Identification.

B. The above price shall include all the work described in this Section and including

all labor, materials, services and equipment necessary to complete the work in

every respect to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Page 146: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 52 of 56

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section includes the furnishing of all materials and

equipment and the performing of all labor to complete Wiring Devices as shown

on the Contract Drawings and as herein specified or directed by the Engineer.

B. This work shall include but is not limited to:

1. Wall switches.

2. Receptacles.

3. Device plates and decorative box covers.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Requirements.

Section 26 05 37 Boxes

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation.

B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, Latest Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with these Specifications.

B. Submit under provisions of Section 26 00 00 “Basic Electrical Requirements”.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,

colors, and configurations.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this Section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.

Page 147: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 53 of 56

2.01 WA L SWITCHES

A.

Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, 120 volt AC, 20 AMP only Industrial

Specification grade general-use snap switch.

B.

Body and Handle: White plastic with toggle handle.

C.

Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

L

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Description: NEMA WD 1 20 AMP, heavy-duty industrial specification grade

general use receptacle.

B. Device Body: White plastic.

C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.

D. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.

E. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit

interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.

2.03 WALL PLATES

A. Cover Plate: Galvanized steel with galvanized box.

B. Wet-use cover plate: Hood type.

Page 148: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 54 of 56

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Special Provisions: Site inspection.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height at 48 inches.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall

plates.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for

connection to wiring devices.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

B. Install devices plumb and level.

C. Install switches with OFF position down.

D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding

conductor.

F. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished

areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Provisions: Site inspection and materials testing.

B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

D. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

Page 149: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 55 of 56

E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

Page 150: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 503 Electrical Specifications Page 56 of 56

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 “Basic Electrical Requirements”.

B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

Page 151: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 1 of 22

SECTION 504

LED LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

This Specification applies to all LED Luminaire (Light Fixtures).

Upgrade retrofit of existing Light Fixtures shall comply where applicable with All Exceptions noted

along with reasoning documentation included with Bid. Exceptions must be preapproved for All

Substitutions.

Submittals shall be provided for each Area and clearly identified as to Area(s) that it is to be used.

Submittal shall be in a 3” minimum Ringed Binder with Index, Labeled Tab Dividers, Narrative for each

location, and Light Fixture Model and Options clearly marked on Cutsheet to clarify exactly what is

proposed.

Point-to-Point Illumination Calculations on 10 foot maximum spacing for All Locations’ Interiors and

Exteriors shall be required for Substitutions thorough evaluation and compliance with Drawing and

Specifications requirements for All Locations.

Requirements’ documentation and location shall be referenced in Light Fixture Substitution’s Basis of

Design Narratives provided with Design Documentation.

Bidder shall be fully responsible for adequate illumination at all interior and exterior locations as indicated

on plans. Noncompliance will require Bidder to remediate any and all shortcomings at no additional cost to

initial Bid Project Cost. All Design Costs shall be included in Bid if applicable.

Detailed Clear Technical Narrative along with Light Fixtures’ Technical Submittal for Each Interior and

Exterior Location and Roadway Section shall be included in Submittals to indicate compliance and for

evaluation of Proposed Substitutions. Noncompliance will Disqualify Bid.

Light Fixtures shall be installed to match the Existing Fixtures Mounting Height and Orientation. See

Drawings and Field Verify. Modifications to existing mounting assemblies shall be included in Bid and

associated Cost included in Turn Key Pricing for each Fixture Type’s Per Unit Price.

All Lighting Fixture Circuits shall have Current, Voltage, and Load Measured and Documented Before

and After Installation. See Section 3.2.1.

Page 152: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 2 of 22

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)

ATIS ANSI O5.1 (2008) Wood Poles -- Specifications & Dimensions

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2013; Errata 2013) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for

Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals

AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA) AWPA U1 (2017) Use Category System: User

Specification for Treated Wood

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIRCONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 90.1 (2016) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A123/A123M (2015) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware ASTM B108/B108M (2015) Standard Specification for

Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM C1089 (2013) Standard Specification for Spun Cast Prestressed Concrete Poles ASTM G154 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV

Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

Page 153: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 3 of 22

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY NORTH AMERICA (IES or IESNA)

IES HB-10 (2011; Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook

IES DG-29 (2011) The Commissioning Process Applied to Lighting and Control Systems

IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B 2009) Nomenclature and Definitions

for Illuminating Engineering

IES RP-8 (2014) Roadway Lighting

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011; Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen

Maintenance of LED Light Sources

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C62.41 (1991; R 1995) Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in

Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V

and Less) AC Power Circuits IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-

Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE Std 1789-2015 (2015) Recommended Practices for Modulating Current in High-

Brightness LEDs for Mitigating Health Risks to Viewers

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) ANSI ANSLG C78.41 (2016) Electric Lamps--Guidelines for

Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps ANSI ANSLG C78.42 (2009; R 2016) For Electric Lamps: High-Pressure

Sodium Lamps ANSI C136.13 (2004; R 2009) American National Standard for Roadway Lighting

Equipment, Metal Brackets for Wood Poles

Page 154: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 4 of 22

ANSI C136.21 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminaires

ANSI C136.3 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Attachments

ANSI C78.1381 (1998) American National Standard for

Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt, M85 Metal-Halide Lamps

ANSI C82.4 (2017) Lamp Ballasts - Ballasts for High- Intensity-Discharge and

Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps ANSI/ANSLG C78.43 (2013) American National Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-

Ended Metal-Halide Lamps ANSI/NEMA C78.LL 1256 (2003; R 2015) Procedures for Fluorescent Lamp Sample

Preparation and the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)

NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2017) Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of

Solid State Lighting Products NEMA ANSLG C78.380 (2007) Electric Lamps - High Intensity

Discharge Lamps, Method of Designation

NEMA ANSLG C78.44 (2008) For Electric Lamps - Double-Ended Metal Halide Lamps NEMA ANSLG C82.11 (2017) Lamp Ballasts - High-Frequency

Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts NEMA ANSLG C82.14 (2016) Lamp Ballasts Low-Frequency Square Wave Electronic

Ballasts -- for Metal Halide Lamps NEMA C136.10 (2010) American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles--Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing

NEMA C136.20 (2012) American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting

Equipment - Fiber Reinforced Composite (FRC) Lighting Poles

NEMA C136.31 (2010) American National for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment

- Luminaire Vibration NEMA C78.LL 3 (2003; R 2015) Electric Lamps - Procedures for High Intensity

Discharge Lamp Sample Preparation and the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure

NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality

Requirements for Lighting Equipment

Page 155: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 5 of 22

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2016) Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures

NEMA IEC 60529 (2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)

NEMA WD 7 (2011; R 2016) Occupancy Motion Sensors Standard

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2017) National Electrical Code(NEC)

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) RUS Bull 1728F-700 (2011) Specification for Wood Poles, Stubs, and Anchor Logs

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices 47 CFR 18 (2011) Industrial, Scientific, and

Medical Equipment

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1029 (1994; Reprint May 2017) UL Standard for Safety High-Intensity-

Discharge Lamp Ballasts

UL 1310 (2011; Reprint Dec 2014) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires UL 773 (1995; Reprint Jul 2015) Standard for Plug-In, Locking Type

Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting UL 773A (2016) Standard for Nonindustrial

Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control UL 8750 (2015; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products UL 916 (2007; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for

Energy Management Equipment UL 935 (2001; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for

Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts

Page 156: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 6 of 22

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these Specifications shall be as defined in IEEE 100 and IESNA RP-16.

b. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70

percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.

c. Bidder and its Team are referred to as Contractor herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-01 Bid and Preconstruction Submittal Requirements for Bid

Contractor shall provide Point-by-Point Calculations with 10 foot maximum spacing to verify substituted luminaires and design layouts for All Interior and Exterior Locations will meet

Substituted illumination and photometric values of the Basis of Design Drawings.

Absolute Photometry of LED luminaires provided by IES LM-79 and LM-80 data shall provide accurate values to assure contractor's luminaires meet the IES Illumination requirements of the initial designs submitted.

Illumination and Energy Savings Testing of installed Fixtures testing will be done at All Locations prior to Final Acceptance. PM Witness and Documentation Required.

Bidder shall be responsible for remediating any shortcomings of the installation that do not meet the Lighting Calculations Submittals at No Additional Cost. Photometric Plan for All Locations;

LED Luminaire Warranty for each Type of Luminaire;

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire Drawings;

Poles, Associated Appurtenances and Wind Load Rating Documentation.

SD-03 Product Data(If Utilized)

LED Luminaires;

Luminaire Light Sources;

Power Supply Units (Drivers);

Lighting Controls;

Time Switch;

Lighting Control Panel;

Motion Sensor;

Photocell;

Concrete poles;

Page 157: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 7 of 22

Aluminum poles;

Steel poles;

Brackets and Mounting Equipment

SD-04 Samples

LED Luminaires;

Submit one sample of each luminaire type, complete with light source and power supply unit. Sample will be returned to the Contractor for installation in the project work. Proof of Concept Testing by Bidder will require a minimum of 10 of each Type of Interior and Exterior Light Fixture to be installed on site and tested to verify Energy Savings and Illumination requirements are satisfied. Bidder shall install as directed at no additional cost.

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires;

Solid State Lamp light output shall have a frequency ≥ 120Hz to minimize health

risks associated with Flicker.

Lamp average light output periodic frequency, highest percent flicker, and highest flicker index

shall be included in Test Reports below.

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report;

LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report;

Operating Test - Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality

Control."

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate;

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be directly correlated from the IES LM-80 Test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and Local ambient operating temperature and conditions shall be taken into consideration.

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Submit instructions for approval prior to installation.

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Operational Service

rasmith
Highlight
Page 158: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 8 of 22

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.

SD-11 U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) Lighting Facts Provide DOE Lighting Facts verification program and standard label information if available.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Include All of the following in this Sub-Section with Substitutions to ensure Quality of Equipment and

Illumination Requirements of the Project will be met.

This is Critical for the Evaluation of Sustitutions.

Noncompliance will disqualify the Substitution.

1.5.1 Drawing Requirements 1.5.1.1 Luminaire Shop Drawings (Specification Sheets)

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA) for exterior Luminaires, accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings. Indicate Correct Voltage for Each Location.

1.5.1.2 Poles

Existing Poles and High Mast Pole with Mounting Assemblies shall be Reused if serviceable. Pole

Specifications are provided here in case poles require replacement. Field Verify and Identify any Pole

deficiencies Prior to Bid and include all costs in Bid.

Change Orders are Not Acceptable as this is a Turn Key Project.

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information. For concrete poles, include: Section and Details to indicate quantities and position of prestressing steel, spiral steel, inserts, and through holes; initial prestressing steel tension; and concrete strengths at release and at 28 days.

1.5.2 Pressure Treated Wood Pole Quality

Ensure the quality of pressure treated wood poles. Furnish an inspection report (for wood poles) of an independent inspection agency stating that offered products comply with AWPA U1 and RUS Bull 1728F-700 standards. The RUS approved Quality Mark "WQC" on each pole will be accepted, in lieu of inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.

1.5.3 Photometric Plan for All Interior and Exterior Locations for Substitutions

For luminaires, include clearly legible computer-generated photometric analysis of the designed to Basics of Design Drawings values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire installation using a light loss factor of 0.8.

Page 159: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 9 of 22

For LED and all other types of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following: Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade and floor, taken at a maximum of every 10 feet for Exterior and 10 feet for Interiors.

Minimum and Maximum Maintained Lux and Footcandle Levels.

Average Maintained Lux and Footcandle level.

Maximum to Minimum Ratio for Horizontal Maintained Illuminance only.

1.5.4 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Provide distribution data according to IESNA classification type as defined in IES HB-10.

b. Shielding and/or Cutoff Optics as defined by IES RP-8 and B.U.G. rating for the installed position as defined by IES TM-15.

c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family.

Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).

d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED Luminaire in accordance with

IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.

e. Provide Wind Loading Information for Luminaires mounted on Existing and New Poles. Weight

and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting brackets shall not exceed

maximum rating of pole and basis of Design Fixtures as installed in particular wind zone area. 1.5.5 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit Test Report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0

Test Report" in IES LM-79.

Page 160: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 10 of 22

1.5.6 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit Report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or module. Submittal shall include:

a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light source being

tested.

b. All data required by IES LM-80.

1.5.6.1 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one of the following:

a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.

b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy – Energy Efficiency &

Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.

c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:

1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity

discharge roadway, area, and interior luminaires and the manufacturer's lab has been

successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years with nationwide

acceptance in the USA. 2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with

National Institute of Standards and Technology.

1.5.8 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the ASPA Manager. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.5.9 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to Bid opening. The Two year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

Page 161: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 11 of 22

1.5.9.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 3-year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of interior, roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years and meet other specified requirements. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to Bid opening. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Provide Documentation in Bid.

1.5.9.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 1 Year prior to date of delivery to site shall Not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

1.6.1 Wood Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Stack poles stored for more than 2 weeks on decay-resisting skids arranged to support the poles without producing noticeable distortion. Store poles to permit free circulation of air; the bottom poles in the stack shall be at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not permit decayed or decaying wood to remain underneath stored poles.

Do not drag treated poles along the ground.

Do not use pole tongs, cant hooks, and other pointed tools capable of producing indentation more than one inch in depth in handling the poles. Do not apply tools to the groundline section of any pole.

1.6.2 Concrete Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation.

1.6. Aluminum and Steel Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.7 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the Warranty Period of the Contract. Warranty Period for Each Location shall start After Final Acceptance for Each Location is Signed by ASPA Project Manager.

Page 162: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 12 of 22

1.7.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

a. Provide a written Five year minimum year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration

such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) All Power Supply Units (Drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period shall start After Final Acceptance of a Location. Contractor shall provide the

ASPA Project Manager signed and dated Warranty Certificates with ASPA named as Owner prior to payment for that location.

1.8 Demolition

Contractor shall remove All demolished materials from ASPA Property except some Salvageable Equipment that ASPA may reuse. Coordinate with ASPA Project Manager. Contractor may reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse as directed. Contractor shall not deposit materials in landfills or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury. Local recyclers may be sought after to reclaim the materials.

Page 163: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 13 of 22

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

All Equipment and associated work not specified shall be in compliance with NEC, IESNA, Local, State, and National requirements.

2.2 LED LUMINAIRES

UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as required to meet all Bid and Specification Requirements. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of Quantity, Type, Wattage, Replacement Wattage and Appurtenances required for a Complete Turn Key Installation. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

2.2.1 General Requirements

a. LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum.

b. Interior LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient temperature range of minus 22 to 122 degrees F.

Exterior LED Luminaires shall be rated minus 22 to 122 degrees F.

c. Luminaires shall be UL listed for Wet locations per UL 1598 for Exteriors. Under Canopies and Warehouse Interiors shall be Damp location per UL1598. Optical compartment for Wet Location LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529. d. LED Luminaires shall be of Modular design to enable repair and/or replacement of components.

e. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the following table, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.

Application

Luminaire Minimum

Efficacy in Lumens per Watt

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Area and

Roadway Luminaires

100

Exterior Floodlights 100

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area

Luminaires

100

High Bay Luminaires 100

Low Bay Luminaires 100

f. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle classifications per IES HB-10.

g. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder coat paint suitable for Port Environment. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or peeling. The Finish Color shall match existing unless specified otherwise. Dark Bronze for Exterior Floodlights. Field verify.

Page 164: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 14 of 22

h. Exterior Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings for LZ3:

1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire

is placed. Indicate in Submittals.

2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.

3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in which luminaire is placed. Indicate in Submittals.

4. Lighting Designs shall comply with IES TM-15 requirements. Narrative for Each

Location shall be included in Substitutions’ Submittals.

i. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory.

j. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel.

k. Luminaire lenses shall as indicated by Basis of Design Light Fixtures.

l. The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires must be accessible without

the use of hand tools to manipulate small screws, bolts, or hardware.

m. Incorporate Modular Electrical Connections, and construct luminaires to allow replacement of

all or any part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, drivers, surge suppressors

and other electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless electric

screwdriver.

n. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number,

date of manufacture, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The

nameplate of the distributing agent will Not be acceptable.

o. Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of plus or minus 5 degrees

to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance with ANSI C136.3.

q. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking, or latching style connectors.

Twist-style wire nuts are Not acceptable.

r. Contractor shall address High-Inrush Currents that may trip a circuit breaker by installing new slow

blow fuse or type C/D breaker as required. High-inrush currents may also result from dimming LED

light sources and shall be addressed by providing new Inrush-Limiting devices and/or by “pairing”

the LED/driver and the dimmer to avoid high-inrush currents.

Indicate in Submittals and Provide/Install as required.

s. LED Housings shall be extruded aluminum. Stamped Metal Housings are Not Acceptable.

Page 165: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 15 of 22

2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources

2.2.2.6 LED Light Sources

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with NEMA ANSLG C78.377:

Maximum CCT: 4000 degrees K b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:

Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 Degrees K light sources.

c. Color Consistency:

Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires.

2.2.3 Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers)

2.2.3.4 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following requirements:

a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.

b. Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or minus 10 percent.

c. Warehouse Canopy and Exterior Luminaires shall be rated to operate between ambient

temperatures of minus 22 to 122 degrees F.

d. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal. See existing Drawings and Field Verify.

e. Operating frequency shall be: 60 Hz.

f. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to 20 percent.

h. Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15, Class B.

i. Shall be RoHS-compliant.

j. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply is Not allowed without prior approval.

k. Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure, such as a Canopy or Warehouse,

or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a sound rating of A.

l. Shall be Dimmable where required and included in Lighting Controls Additive Alternate if applicable, and compatible with a standard dimming control circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system. Field verify prior to Bid submittal and include all associated costs.

m. Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns light source off until normal

operating temperature is achieved.

Page 166: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 16 of 22

n. Solid State Lamp light output shall have a frequency ≥ 120Hz to minimize health risks associated with Flicker.

o. Lamp average light output periodic Frequency, highest percent Flicker, and highest Flicker index shall be included in Test Reports below.

2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide Surge Protection Integral to Luminaire to match the Basics of Design Luminaires or on Luminaire’s Circuit to meet C Low waveforms as defined by IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1, Location Category C. High quality LED Drivers that can handle Power Surges are required and this shall be clearly indicated in the Submittals for each Luminaire. Contractor shall check the Building Grounding System for frequency-dependant ground plane which is required for protecting LED Drivers to provide stability to operate electronic components, especially Driver capacitor and IC components before installing any solid-state lighting. Provide formal Test Report to ASPA Project Manager immediately after completion of testing with PM on site as witness. Msin TVSS System shall be installed at the incoming Service Entrance switchboard at each location. This is required due to LED Drivers can be damaged due to Transients. Include in Components Submittal and Narrative for each Location. All costs shall be included in Bid Table Electrical Modifications.

2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS AND PHOTOCELLS

Provide a Control System Interface within each luminaire that is compatible with the Existing and Optional New Control System at each location. Field verify prior to Bid, include all associated costs, and include in Submittals.

2.4.1 Photocell

Photocells shall be heavy duty industrial type suitable for LED with warranty of 10 years minimum in a Marine environment.

UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed silicon diode light sensor type, rated as required per circuit served. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position. Housing shall be constructed of UV stabilized polypropylene, rated to operate within a temperature range of minus minus 40 to 158 degrees F. Photocell shall have a 1/2 in threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide swivel base type housing. Photocell shall be twist-lock receptacle type conforming to NEMA C136.10. Provide with solid brass prongs and voltage markings and color coding on exterior of housing. Photocell shall turn On at 10-30 lux or 1-3 footcandles and turn off at 30 to 150 lux or 3 to 15 footcandles. A Time Delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens with Shield in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a nuisance turnoff condition.

2.5 POLES

Existing Poles and High Mast Poles with Mounting Assemblies shall be Reused if serviceable.

Pole Specifications are provided here in case poles require replacement.

Page 167: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 17 of 22

Field Verify and Identify any Pole deficiencies Prior to Bid and include All Costs in Bid. Change

Orders are Not Acceptable as this is a Turn Key Project.

Provide poles with appurtenances designed for Wind Loading Rating of 140 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be embedded or anchor-base type as specified and designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles, other than wood poles, shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws with watertight neoprene seal. Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.

2.5.1 Concrete Poles

Provide concrete poles conforming to ASTM C1089. Cross-sectional shape shall be round or multi-sided to match existing where applicable.

2.5.1.1 Steel Reinforcing

Prestressed concrete pole shafts shall be reinforced with steel prestressing members. Design shall provide internal longitudinal loading by either pretensioning or post tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members.

2.5.1.2 Tensioned Reinforcing

Primary reinforcement steel used for a prestressed concrete pole shaft shall be tensioned between 60 to 70 percent of its ultimate strength. The amount of reinforcement shall be such that when reinforcement is tensioned to 70 percent of its ultimate strength, the total resultant tensile force does not exceed the minimum section compressive strength of the concrete.

2.5.1.3 Coating and Sleeves for Reinforcing Members

Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to required core openings, such as handhole and wiring inlet, reinforcing shall be protected with a vaporproof noncorrosive sleeve over the length without the 1/2 inch concrete coverage. Each steel reinforcing member which is to be post-tensioned shall have a nonmigrating slipper coating applied prior to the addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout the length of such member.

2.5.1.4 Strength Requirement

As an exception to the requirements of ASTM C1089, poles shall be naturally cured to achieve a 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi. Poles shall not be subjected to severe temperature changes during the curing period.

2.5.1.5 Shaft Preparation

Completed prestressed concrete pole shaft shall have a hard, smooth, nonporous surface that is resistant to soil acids, road salts, and attacks of water and frost, and shall be clean, smooth, and free of surface voids and internal honeycombing. Poles shall not be installed for at least 15 days after manufacture.

2.5.2 Aluminum Poles

Page 168: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 18 of 22

Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

2.5.3 Steel Poles

AASHTO LTS. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M factory finish. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Pole shall be anchor bolt mounted type. Poles shall have tapered tubular members, either round in cross section or polygonal. Pole shafts shall be one piece. Poles shall be welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other means of fastening except as specifically approved. Pole markings shall be approximately 4 feet above finished grade and shall include manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length. Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 36,000 psi.

2.5.4 Wood Poles

ATIS ANSI O5.1 and RUS Bull 1728F-700 of Southern Yellow Pine. Poles shall be gained, bored, and roofed before treatment. Poles shall be treated full length with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) or ammoniacal copper arsenate (ACA) according to AWPA U1 as referenced in RUS Bull 1728F-700. Poles shall be branded by manufacturer with manufacturer's mark and date of treatment, height and class of pole, wood species, preservation code, and retention. Place the brand so that the bottom of the brand or disc is 6 feet above finished grade.

2.6 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

ANSI C136.3, ANSI C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch galvanized steel pipe or aluminum secured to matching material pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than Existing mounting height. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.

2.7 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the

rod shall be galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be 4000 psi minimum.

Page 169: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 19 of 22

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.8.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.8.2 Labels

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.

2.9 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

Page 170: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 20 of 22

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Wood Poles

Pole holes shall be at least as large at the top as at the bottom and shall be large enough to provide 4 inches of clearance between the pole

and the side of the hole.

a. Setting depth: Pole setting depths shall be per directions of Structural Engineer stamped in the state

of Alabama.

b. Soil setting: "Setting in Soil" depths shall apply where pole holes are in soil, sand, or gravel or any

combination of these. At corners, dead ends and other points of extra strain, poles 40 feet long or more shall be set 12 inches deeper.

c. Setting on sloping ground: On sloping ground, measure the depth of the hole from the low side of

the hole.

d. Backfill: Tamp pole backfill for the full depth of the hole and mound the excess fill around the pole.

3.1.2 Concrete Poles

Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions and as required to withstand 140 MPH Winds..

3.1.4 Aluminum and Steel Poles

Provide concrete pole foundations with hot dip galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods shall be 4000 psi rated. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location. After installation, paint exposed surfaces of steel poles with two finish coats of exterior oil paint of a matching color. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions. Alterations to poles after fabrication will void manufacturer's warranty and shall not be allowed.

3.1.5 Pole Setting

Depth shall be as required to withstand 140 MPH Winds. Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6 inch maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations and aim to north as much as possible avoiding conflict with other lighting sources to provide dusk to dawn operation capability.

Page 171: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 21 of 22

Set adjustable window slide for photocell turn-on capability.

3.1.7 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures per NEC requirements. Existing grounding may be reused where serviceable. Field verify prior to Bid and include all costs in Bid. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.8 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match original finish of luminaire with manufacture’s approved paint and primer.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted with ASPA Project Manager as witness. Conduct an operating test with Illumination Calculations Verification and Power Savings after 20 hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section with ASPA Project Manager as witness. Written Final Acceptance for Each Location will be issued after Testing is acceptable.

3.2.1 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING

The following Commissioning and Testing Process shall be performed at a minimum along

with applicable Final Commissioning Requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and

IEC DG-29.

1. Participants shall include Contractor Superintendent, Electrical Subcontractor,

ASPA Project Manager, and ASPA Representative(s).

2. All Lighting and Controls shall be Tested.

3. Perform Lighting Systems Startup and ensure that the All Fixtures are operational

and Fixtures are clean.

4. Check all Occupancy Sensor placements and test reliability of

activation/deactivation.

5. Test Photocells for functionality and accuracy.

6. Check all Switches to ensure proper operation and circuiting.

7. Individually check all Lighting Panel Schedules to ensure that areas are correctly listed

and they are programmed per the Owner’s direction. Updated Schedules shall be typed.

8. Lighting Levels shall be thoroughly checked to ensure compliance with Design for

each Location.

Page 172: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Section 504 Lighting Specifications Page 22 of 22

All Lighting Fixture Circuits shall have Current, Voltage, and Load Measured and

Documented Before and After Upgrade.

9. Test operation of circuits by changing system Date and Time to cause various

circuits to switch modes. For rooms with occupancy sensors, validate the circuit

energizes with occupancy in the space after the lights have been off. Test warning

Flicker prior to off sweep. Test cleaning and shed features.

10. Contractor shall check schedules and lighting levels in all modes. Coordinate with

Owner/Occupant for settings.

11. For exterior fixtures, simulate night mode to validate function. Measure and record

light levels at Night to ensure they meet the requirements and are provide adequate

security. Check for excessive light level fluctuations, bright spots and dark spots.

12. Verify B.U.G. requirements are met at all exterior locations.

-- End of Section --

Page 173: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 16 4300  Part 1 -- GENERAL: A. DESCRIPTION:

1. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for a Surge Protective Device (SPD) also known as a Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS). Surge protective devices are used for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching.

B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

1. General electrical requirements 2. Raceways, boxes, and fittings 3. Wire and cable 4. Low Voltage motor control 5. Variable frequency drives 6. Grounding 7. Lightning protection system

C. SUBMITTALS:

1. Submit product data and manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. The SPD submittals shall also include:

a. Dimensional drawing of each suppressor types indicating mounting arrangements. b. UL 1449 Clamping Voltage documentation.

D. TEST REPORTS

1. The SPD manufacturer shall provide test results, on request, for the models shipped.

2. The test conducted shall be per ANSI C62.41.2 and ANSI C62.45 . The units shall be tested in all modes listed in this specification for Category C.

D. WARRANTY

1. The surge suppressor manufacturer shall warrant the surge protective devices and

supporting components against defects in material and workmanship for a period of Ten Years.

F. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

1. Surge protective devices shall be manufactured in the USA, by a company normally

engaged in the design and manufacture of such devices for at least Ten (10) Years.

2. Both the service entrance and distribution panel SPDs shall be of the same manufacturer.

G. SAFETY AGENCY APPROVALS

1. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. They shall also be CSA and UL approved.

Page 174: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Part 2 – PRODUCTS :

A. SERVICE ENTRANCE:

1. Surge Protective Devices shall be installed at All Service Entrances of each building that do not have Surge Protection installed. Field verify and provide as required.

2. Suppressors shall be tested with a Category C High exposure waveform of 10K , 8/20 sec. 3. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the

system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground.

4. The surge suppressor shall have a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) per NEC Article 285, up to a maximum of 200 kA. 5. Green Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided.

6. The surge protective device shall be equipped with an Audible Alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge circuitry has been damaged. A silence button shall be provided with the alarm.

7. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

a. Minimum current rating (L-N + L-G): 120,000 amperes per phase. b. UL 1449, Second Edition Clamping voltage shall not exceed the following:

VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 120/208 400V 400V 400V 277/480 800V 800V 800V

8. Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally. 9. Maximum continuous operating voltage of the suppressor shall be greater than 115% of

the nominal system voltage. 10. The following equipment is approved per the above specifications:

a. Titan 200BPF/xxx/xxx. (xxx/xxx is voltage shown above) or Preapproved Equal.

Page 175: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

A. SERVICE ENTRANCE

Part 3 -- EXECUTION:

1. Install one primary suppressor at each Building’s Service Entrance.

Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance.

3. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be at least #6 AWG stranded copper conductor or larger.

4. The conductors shall be kept as short and straight as possible.

5. Suppressor’s ground shall be connected to the Service Entrance Ground.

End of Section

Page 176: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 1 of 21

SECTION 505  

NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS    PART 1 – GENERAL 

 

1.1  Summary  

A.    Section includes a networked lighting control system comprised of the following components: 

1.    System Software Interfaces 

a.  Management Interface 

b.    Historical Database and Analytics Interface 

c.  Visualization Interface 

d.    Personal Control Applications 

2.    System Backbone and Integration Equipment 

a.  System Controller 

b.   OpenADR Interface 

3.   Wireless Networked Devices 

a.  Sensor Interface 

b.    Light Controllers 

c.  Digital Sensors 

d.    Sensor‐Controllers 

e.    Networked Luminaires 

f.  Communication Bridge 

4.   Wired Networked Devices 

a.  Wallstations 

b.    Graphical Wallstations 

c.  Auxiliary Input / Output Devices 

d.    Communication Bridge 

B.    The networked lighting control system shall meet all of the characteristics and performance requirements specified herein. 

C.    The contractor shall provide, install and verify proper operation of all equipment necessary for proper operation of the system as specified herein and as shown on applicable drawings. 

 

  1.1.  Related Documents 

 

A.    Section 262726 Wiring Devices 

B.    Section 260923 Lighting Control Devices 

C.    Section 260943.13 Digital‐Network Lighting Controls 

D.   Section 260943.16 Addressable Fixture Lighting Control 

E.    Section 260943.19 Wireless Network Lighting Controls 

Page 177: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 2 of 21

F.  Section 265113 Interior Lighting Fixtures  

  1.3  Submittals 

 

A.    Submittal shall be provided including the following items. 

1.    Bill of Materials necessary to install the networked lighting control system. 

2.    Product Specification Sheets indicating general device descriptions, dimensions, electrical specifications, wiring details, and nomenclature. 

3.    Riser Diagrams showing device wiring connections of system backbone and also typical per room/area type. 

4.    Information Technology (IT) connection information pertaining to interconnection with facility IT networking equipment and third‐party systems. 

5.    Other Diagrams and Operational Descriptions – as needed to indicate system operation or interaction with other system(s). 

6.    Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet (must be completed prior to factory start‐ up). 

7.    Service Specification Sheets indicating general service descriptions, including startup, training, post‐startup support, and service contract terms. 

8.    Hardware and Software Operation Manuals.  

  1.4  Approvals 

 

A.   Prior approval from owner’s representative is required for products or systems manufactured by companies not specified in the Network Lighting Controls section of this specification. 

B.   Any alternate product or system that has not received prior approval from the owner’s representative at least 10 days prior to submission of a proposal package shall be rejected. 

C.    Alternate products or systems require submission of catalog datasheets, system overview documents and installation manuals to owner’s representative. 

D.   For any alternate system that does not support any form of wireless communication to networked luminaires, networked control devices, networked sensors, or networked input devices, bidders shall provide a total installed cost including itemized labor costs for installing network wiring to luminaires, control devices, sensors, input devices and other required system peripherals. 

 

  1.5  Quality Assurance 

 

A.   Product Qualifications 

1.    System electrical components shall be listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (e.g., UL, ETL, or CSA) and shall be labeled with required markings as applicable. 

2.    System shall be listed as qualified under DesignLights Consortium Networked Lighting Control System Specification V1.01. 

3.    System luminaires and controls are certified by manufacturer to have been designed, manufactured and tested for interoperability. 

Page 178: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 3 of 21

4.    All components shall be subjected to 100% end of line testing prior to shipment to the project site to ensure proper device operation. 

5.    All components and the manufacturing facility where product was manufactured must be RoHS compliant. 

B.    Installation and Startup Qualifications 

1.    System startup shall be performed by qualified personnel approved or certified by the manufacturer. 

C.    Service and Support Requirements 

1.    Phone Support: Toll free technical support shall be available. 

2.    Remote Support: The bidder shall offer a remote support capability. 

3.    Onsite Support: The bidder shall offer onsite support that is billable at whole day rates. 

4.    Service Contract: The bidder shall offer a Service Contract that packages phone, remote, and onsite support calls for the project. Response times for each type of support call shall be indicated in the terms of the service contract included in the bid package. 

 

  1.6  Project Conditions 

 

A.   Only install equipment after the following site conditions are maintained: 

1.    Ambient Temperature: 14 to 105 degrees F (‐10 to 40 degrees C) 

2.    Relative Humidity: less than 90% non‐condensing 

B.    Equipment shall not be subjected to dust, debris, moisture, or temperature and humidity conditions exceeding the requirements indicated above, at any point prior to installation. 

C.   Only properly rated equipment and enclosures, installed per the manufacturer’s instructions, may be subjected to dust and moisture following installation. 

 

  1.7  Warranty 

 

A.   The manufacturer shall provide a minimum five‐year warranty on all hardware devices supplied and installed. Warranty coverage shall begin on the date of shipment. 

B.    The hardware warranty shall cover repair or replacement any defective products within the warranty period. 

 

  1.8  Maintenance & Sustainability 

 

A.   The manufacturer shall make available to the owner new parts, upgrades, and/or replacements available for a minimum of 5 years following installation. 

Page 179: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 4 of 21

PART 2 – EQUIPMENT  

2.1  Manufacturers  

A.   Acceptable Manufacturers 

1.    Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 

B.   Basis of Design System: Acuity Controls XPoint Wireless  

  2.2  System Compliance 

 

A.    System components shall comply with UL 916 and UL 924 standards where applicable. B.    

System components shall comply with CFR Title 47, Part 15 standards where applicable. C.    

System components shall comply with ISED Canada RSS‐247 standards where applicable. D.   

All equipment shall be installed and connected in compliance with NFPA 70. 

  2.3  System Performance Requirements 

 

A.    System Architecture  

1.    System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts: (1) networkable intelligent lighting control devices, (2) standalone lighting control zones using distributed intelligence, (3) optional system backbone for remote, time based and global operation. 

 

2.    Intelligent lighting control devices shall have individually addressable network communication capability and consist of one or more basic lighting control components: occupancy sensor, photocell sensor, relay, dimming output, and manual wall station capable of indicating switching and/or dimming.  Combining one or more of these components into a single device enclosure shall be permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system. 

 

3.    System must be capable of interfacing directly with networked luminaires utilizing wireless RF communication to interconnect networked luminaires with control components such as sensors, wall stations and system backbone (see Control Zone Characteristics). 

 

4.    Networked luminaires and intelligent lighting control devices shall support individual (unique) configuration of device settings and properties, with such configuration residing within the networked luminaires and intelligent control devices. 

 

5.    Lighting control zones consisting of one or more networked luminaires and intelligent lighting control devices and shall be capable of providing automatic control from sensors (occupancy and/or photocell) and manual control from local wallstations without requiring connection to a higher level system backbone; this capability is referred to as “distributed intelligence.” 

 

a.  Wireless lighting control zones of at least 128 devices per zone shall be supported.  

6.    Networked luminaires and intelligent lighting control devices shall have distributed intelligence programming stored in non‐volatile memory, such that following any loss of power the lighting control zones shall operate according to their defined default settings and sequence of operations. 

Page 180: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 5 of 21

7.    Lighting control zones shall be capable of being networked with a higher level system backbone to provide time based control, remote control from inputs and/or systems external to the control zone, and remote configuration and monitoring through a software interface. 

 

8.    The system may include one or more system controllers that provide time‐based control and global system control. The system controller also provides a means of connecting the lighting control system to a system software interface and building management systems via BACnet/IP protocol. 

 

9.    The system may include “communication bridge” devices that route communication from lighting control zones (wired or wireless) to and from the system controller, for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements. 

 

10. All devices shall support remote firmware update, such that physical access to each device is not necessary, for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date. 

 

B.   Wireless Networked Control Zone Characteristics  

1.    No wired control connections between wireless networked devices shall be required.  

2.   Wireless networked devices shall communicate via radio frequency of 2.4 GHz using a standards‐based wireless networking protocol. 

 

3.   Wireless network shall be self‐healing, such that optimum routing paths between devices are automatically established or restored if any nodes are respectively added to or removed from the wireless network. 

 

4.   Wireless network communication shall support uniform and instant response such that all luminaires in a lighting control zone respond immediately and synchronously in response to a sensor or wallstation signal. 

 

5.    To support the system architecture requirement for distributed intelligence, wireless network communication shall support communication of control signals from sensors and wallstations to networked luminaires and wireless load control devices, without requiring any communication, interpretation, or translation of information through a backbone device such as a wireless access point, communication bridge or gateway. 

 

6.    All wireless communication shall be encrypted using the 128‐bit Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). 

 

7.    Accounting for typical environmental conditions and typical building construction materials encountered within parking garage environments or within high‐bay applications in industrial, warehouse, convention center and gymnasium environments, wireless networked devices shall be capable of communicating to at least 30’ spacing between luminaires with embedded wireless transceivers, and shall be capable of communicating to at least 60’ spacing between wireless networked devices installed external to luminaire housings or other enclosures. 

 

a.  Wireless networked devices shall have a line‐of‐sight communication range of at least 1000’ under ideal environmental conditions. 

 

8.    The following types of networked control devices shall be provided for egress and/or emergency light fixtures: 

Page 181: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 6 of 21

a.  UL924 Listed Line‐Voltage power sensing: These devices shall be listed as emergency relays under the UL924 standard, and shall automatically close the load control relay(s) and provide 100% light output upon detection of loss or interruption of power sensed via line voltage connections. 

 

C.    System Integration Capabilities  

1.    The system shall interface with third party building management systems (BMS) to support two‐way communication using the industry standard BACnet/IP or BACnet/MSTP protocols. The following system integration capabilities shall be available via BACnet/IP and BACnet/MSTP protocols: 

 

a.  The system shall support control of individual devices, including, but not limited to, control of relay and dimming output. All system devices shall be available for control. 

 

b.    The system shall support reading of individual device status information, including but not limited to, relay state, dimming output, power measurement, occupancy sensor status, and photocell sensor states or readings. All system devices shall be available for polling for devices status. 

 

c.  The system shall support activation of pre‐defined system Global Profiles (see Supported Sequence of Operations for further definition of Global Profile capabilities). 

 

2. The system shall support activation of Profiles (local or global) and Preset Scenes from third party systems by receiving dry contact closure output signals or digital commands via RS‐ 232/RS‐485. (See Supported Sequence of Operations for further definition of Profile and Scene Preset capabilities.)

3. The system shall support activation of system profiles from Demand Response Automation Servers via the OpenADR 2.0a protocol.

D. Su pported Sequence of Operations

1. The following characteristics and performance requirements shall apply to wireless control zones provided by the system.

2. Control Zones

a.  Networked luminaires and intelligent lighting control devices installed in an area (also referred to as a group of devices) shall be capable of transmitting and tracking occupancy sensor, photocell sensor, and manual switch information within at least 48 unique control zones to support different and reconfigurable sequences of operation within the area. These shall also be referred to as local control zones. 

 

3.   Wallstation Capabilities  

a.  Wallstations shall be provided to support the following capabilities:  

1)   On/Off of a local control zone.  

2)   Continuous dimming control of light level of a local control zone.  

3)   Preset Scenes that can activate a specific combination of light levels across local and/or global zones, as required. 

Page 182: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 7 of 21

4)   Profile Scenes that can modify the sequence of operation for selected devices in response to a button press.  Refer to “Schedule and Global Profile Capabilities” within the Supported Sequence of Operations section for additional definition of Profile capabilities required to be configurable in response to a wallstation button press. 

b.    3‐way / multi‐way control: multiple wallstations shall be capable of controlling the same local and global control zones, so as to support “multi‐way” switching, dimming, preset scene, and profile scene control. 

 

4.    Occupancy Sensing Capabilities  

a.  Occupancy sensors shall be configurable to control a local zone.  

b.   Multi‐sensor control: multiple occupancy sensors shall be capable of controlling the same local zones. This capability combines occupancy sensing coverage from multiple sensors without consuming multiple control zone addresses. 

 

c.  System shall support the following types of occupancy sensing sequence of operations: 

 

1)   On/Off Occupancy Sensing  

2)   Partial‐On Occupancy Sensing  

3)   Partial‐Off Occupancy Sensing  

4)   Vacancy Sensing (Manual‐On / Automatic‐Off)  

d.   On/Off, Partial‐On, and Partial‐Off Occupancy Sensing modes shall function according to the following sequence of operation: 

 

1)   Occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on to a designated level when occupancy is detected. To support fine tuning of Partial‐On sequences the designated occupied light level shall support at least 100 dimming levels. 

 

2)   Occupancy sensors automatically turn lights off or to a dimmed state (Partial‐Off) when vacancy occurs or if sufficient daylight is detected. To support fine tuning of Partial‐Off sequences the designated unoccupied dim level shall support at least 100 dimming levels. 

 

3)    To provide additional energy savings the system shall also be capable of combining Partial‐Off and Full‐Off operation by dimming the lights to a designated level when vacant and then turning the lights off completely after an additional amount of time. 

 

4)   Photocell readings, if enabled in the Occupancy Sensing control zone, shall be capable of automatically adjusting the light level during occupied or unoccupied conditions as necessary to further reduce energy usage. Additional requirements and details for photocell sensing capabilities are indicated under Photocell Sensing Capabilities. 

 

5)    The use of a wallstation shall change the dimming level or turn lights off as selected by the occupant. The lights shall remain in this manually‐specified light level until the zone becomes vacant; upon vacancy the normal sequence of operation, as defined above, shall proceed. 

Page 183: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 8 of 21

e.    Vacancy Sensing mode (also referred to as Manual‐On / Automatic‐Off) shall function according to the following sequence of operation: 

 

1)    The use of a wallstation is required turn lights on. The system shall be capable of programming the zone to turn on to either to a designated light level or the previous light level. Initially occupying the space without using a wallstation shall not result in any change in light level. 

 

2)   Occupancy sensors shall automatically turn lights off when vacancy occurs is detected. To provide an enhanced occupant experience the system shall also be capable of dimming the lights when vacant and then turning the lights off completely after an additional amount of time. 

 

3)    To minimize occupant impact in case the area or zone is still physically occupied following dimming or shutoff of the lights due to detection of vacancy, the system shall support an “automatic grace period” immediately following detection of vacancy, during which time any detected occupancy shall result in the lights reverting to the previous level. After the grace period has expired, the use of a wallstation is required to turn lights on. 

 

4)   Photocell readings, if enabled in the Occupancy Sensing control zone, shall be capable of automatically adjusting the light level as necessary to further reduce energy usage. Additional requirements and details for photocell sensing capabilities are indicated under Photocell Sensing Capabilities. 

 

5)   At any time, the use of a wallstation shall change the dimming level or turn lights off as selected by the occupant. The lights shall remain in this manually‐specified light level until the zone becomes vacant; upon vacancy the normal sequence of operation, as defined above, shall proceed. 

 

f.  To accommodate different types of environments, vacancy time delays before dimming or shutting off lights shall be specifiable for control zones between 15 seconds to 2 hours. 

 

5.    Photocell Sensing Capabilities (Automatic Daylight Sensing)  

a.  Photocell sensing devices shall be configurable to control a local zone.  

b.    The system shall support continuous dimming in response to a photocell, where the control zone automatically adjusts its dimming output in response to photocell readings. 

 

c.  The photocell response shall be configurable to adjust the photocell setpoint and dimming rates. 

 

d.    The photocell response shall be configurable to optionally allow the control zone to automatically turn off if sufficient daylight is present. A time delay or adaptive setpoint adjustable behavior may be used to prevent the system from exhibiting nuisance on/off switching. 

 

6.    Schedule and Global Profile Capabilities  

a.  The system shall be capable of automatically modifying the sequence of operation for selected devices in response to any of the following: a time‐of‐day schedule, wallstation input, contact closure input state, RS‐232/RS‐485 command, BACnet 

Page 184: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 9 of 21

input command, and demand response signal. This capability is defined as supporting “Global Profiles” and is used to dynamically optimize the occupant experience and lighting energy usage. 

 

b.    Scheduling. Global profiles may be scheduled with the following capabilities:  

1)   Global Profiles shall be stored within and executed from the system controller (via internal timeclock) such that a dedicated software host or server is not required to be online to support automatic scheduling and/or operation of Global Profiles. 

 

2)    Timeclock: Global Profile time of day schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrence settings: daily, specific days of week, every “n” number of days, weekly, monthly, and yearly. Lighting control profile schedules shall support definition of start date, end date, end after “n” recurrences, or never ending. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired. 

 

3)   Astronomical Clock: Global Profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to timed offsets relative to sunrise or sunset. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an astronomical clock. 

 

4)   Blink warning and timed extension capabilities. At the end of a scheduled period, the system shall be capable of providing a visible “blink warning” 5 minutes prior to the end of the schedule. Wallstations may be programmed to provide timed overrides that turn the lights on for an additional period of time. Timed override duration shall be programmable for each individual device, zone of devices, or customized group of devices, ranging from 5 minutes to 12 hours. 

 

5)    Software management interface shall be capable of displaying a graphic calendar view of profile schedules for each control zone. 

 

c.  System Global Profiles shall have the following additional capabilities:  

1)   Global Profiles shall be capable of being manually activated directly from the system controller, specially programmed input devices, and software management interface. 

 

2)   Global Profiles shall be selectable to apply to a single device, zone of devices, or customized group of devices. 

 

3)   Parameters that shall be configurable and assigned to a Global Profile include light level, response to occupancy sensors (including enabling/disabling response), response to daylight sensors (including enabling/disabling response), and enabling/disabling of wallstations. 

 

d.    A backup of Global Profiles shall be stored on the software’s host server such that the Profile backup can be applied to a replacement system controller. 

 

7.    Automated demand response capabilities. Profiles created for automated demand response events shall support automatic reduction of light level to programmable values. At least four levels of demand response profiles shall be supported by the system. 

Page 185: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 10 of 21

 

2.4  System Software Interfaces  

A.   Management Interface  

1.    Product Series: SensorView  

2.    System shall provide a web‐based management interface that provides remote system control, live status monitoring, and configuration capabilities of lighting control settings and schedules. 

 

3.   Management interface must be compatible with industry‐standard web browser clients, including, but not limited to, Microsoft Internet Explorer®, Apple Safari®, Google Chrome®, Mozilla Firefox®. 

 

4.   Management interface shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password, and shall support creation of at least 100 unique user accounts. 

 

5.   Management interface shall support at least three permission levels for users: read‐only, read & change settings, and full administrative system access. 

 

6.   Management interface shall be capable of restricting read‐only and read & change access for user accounts to specific devices within the system. 

 

7.    All system devices shall be capable of being given user‐defined names.  

8.    The following device identification information shall be displayed in the Management interface: model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), and parent network device. 

 

9.   Management interface shall be able to read the live status of a networked luminaire or intelligent control device and shall be capable of displaying luminaire on/off status, dim level, power measurement, device temperature, PIR occupancy sensor status, microphonic occupancy sensor status, remaining occupancy time delay, photocell reading, and active Scenes or Profiles. 

 

10. Management interface shall be able to read the current active settings of a networked luminaire or intelligent control device and shall be capable of displaying dimming trim levels, occupancy sensor and photocell enable/disable, occupancy sensor time delay and light level settings, occupancy sensor response (normal or vacancy), and photocell setpoints and transition time delays. 

 

11. Management interface shall be able to change the current active settings and also default settings for an individual networked luminaire or intelligent control device. 

 

12. Management interface shall be capable of applying settings changes for a zone of devices or a group of selected devices using a single “save” action that does not require the user to save settings changes for each individual device. 

 

13. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the management interface.  

14. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the management interface. 

 

15. All sensitive information stored by the software shall be encrypted. 

Page 186: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 11 of 21

16. All system software updates must be available for automatic download and installation via the internet. 

 

B.   Historical Database and Analytics Interface  

1.    Product Series: SensorView GreenScreen  

2.    System shall provide a historical database that stores device operational history and calculates energy usage for all networked luminaires and intelligent control devices. 

 

3.    System shall be capable of reporting lighting system events and performance data back to the historical database for display and analysis. 

 

4.    Historical database shall be capable of recording historical data for up to 20,000 networked devices for a period of at least 1 calendar year. 

 

5.    An “Energy Scorecard” shall be displayed that shows calculated energy savings in dollars, kWh, or CO2. 

 

6.    Software shall calculate the allocation of energy savings to different control measures (occupancy sensors, photocells, manual switching, etc.). 

 

7.    Energy savings data shall be calculated for the system as a whole or for individual zones.  

8.    A time scaled graph showing all relay transitions shall be presented.  

9.    A time scaled graph showing a zones occupancy time delay shall be presented  

10. A time scaled graph showing the total light level shall be presented.  

11. User shall be able to customize the baseline run‐time hours for a space.  

12. User shall be able to customize up to four time‐of‐day billing rates and schedules.  

13. Historical data shall be exportable from the Historical Database via a “CSV” type of file format. 

 

C.    Visualization Interfaces  

1.    Product Series: SensorView nFloorplan  

2.    System shall provide a web‐based visualization interface that displays graphical floorplan.  

3.    Graphical floorplan shall offer the following types of system visualization:  

a.  Full Device Option ‐ A master graphic of the entire building, by floor, showing each control device installed in the project with zones outlined to include but not be limited to the following: 

 

1)   Controls embedded light fixtures  

2)   Controls devices not embedded in light fixtures  

3)   Daylight Sensors  

4)   Occupancy Sensors  

5)   Wall Switches and Dimmers  

6)    Scene Controllers 

Page 187: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 12 of 21

7)   Networked Relays  

8)   Bridges  

9)    System Controllers  

10) Panels  

11) Zone outlines  

b.    Zone Only Option ‐ A master graphic of the entire building, by floor, showing only control zones: 

 

1)    Zones outlined  

c.  Allow for pan and zoom commands so smaller areas can be displayed on a larger scale simply by panning and zooming each floor’s master graphic. 

 

d.    A mouse click on any control device shall display the following information (as applicable): 

 

1)    The device catalog number.  

2)    The device name and custom label.  

3)   Device diagnostic information.  

4)    Information about the device status or current configuration is available with an additional mouse click. 

 

D.   Personal Control Applications  

1.    Product Series: Virtual Wallpods  

2.    Software interface shall support personal control software applications that provide user‐ specific control of individual luminaires, control zones, and scene presets. 

 

3.    Personal control applications shall support control of dimming output or definition of dimming presets for luminaires and devices that are dimmable. 

 

4.    The system administrator shall be capable of defining personal control permissions for each user account. 

 

5.    Software interface shall provide a Microsoft Windows® operating system taskbar application for personal lighting control. 

 

6.    Software interface shall provide an Apple iOS ® operating system application (supported by mobile phones and mobile tablet devices) for personal lighting control. 

   2.4  System Backbone and System Integration Equipment 

 

A.    System Controller  

1.    Product Series:  nECY 2.    System Controller shall be multi‐tasking, real‐time digital control processor consisting of 

modular hardware with plug‐in enclosed processors, communication controllers, and power supplies. 

Page 188: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 13 of 21

3.    System Controller shall have 32‐bit microprocessor operating at a minimum of 1 GHz. 4.    System Controller shall have minimum of 512MB memory, with a minimum of 4GB non‐ 

volatile flash, to support its own operating system and databases. 5.    System Controller shall perform the following functions: 

 

a.  Facilitation of global network communication between different areas and control zones. 

 

b.    Time‐based control of downstream wired and wireless network devices. 

c.  Linking into an Ethernet network. 

d.    Integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) and Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment. 

 

e.    Connection to various software interfaces, including management interface, historical database and analytics interface, visualization interface, and personal control applications. 

 

6.    System Controller shall have an integral web server to support configuration, diagnostics and hosting of software interfaces. 

 

7.    Device shall have option for a graphical touch screen to support configuration and diagnostics. 

 

8.    Device shall have three RJ‐45 networked lighting control ports for connection to any of the following: 

 

a.  The graphical touch screen  

b.   Wired communication bridges  

c.  Direct connection to networked wired luminaires and intelligent lighting control devices (up to 128 total devices per port) 

 

9.    Device shall support a wireless network communication bridge for communication to wireless network lighting control zones. 

 

10. Device shall be capable of communicating with software interfaces via LAN connection.  

11. Device shall automatically detect all networked devices connected to it, including those connected to wired and wireless communication bridges. 

 

12. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.  

13. Device shall have 2 switched RJ‐45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet ports for local area network (LAN) connection. 

 

a.  Ethernet connection shall support daisy chain wiring to other lighting control system LAN devices, such as other system controllers. 

 

b.    Ethernet connection shall support IPv4 and shall be capable of using a dedicated static or DHCP assigned IP address. 

 

14. Device shall have 2 x USB 2.0 Expansion ports for 802.11 Wi‐Fi Adapter enabling wireless connectivity including: 

a.  Hot Spot b.    Access Point c.  Client 

Page 189: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 14 of 21

15.  Each System Controller shall be capable of managing and operating at least 750 networked devices (wired or wireless). 

 

a.  Multiple System Controllers may be networked together via LAN connection to scale the system up to 20,000 networked devices. 

 

16.  System Controller shall support BACnet/IP and BACnet/MSTP protocols to directly interface with BMS and HVAC equipment without the need for additional protocol translation gateways. 

 

a.  BACnet/MSTP shall support up to minimum of 50 additional BACnet MS/TP controllers in addition to the Expansion I/O modules. 

b.    BACnet/MSTP shall support 9600 to 115200 baud. c.  System Controller shall be BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL listed) using Device 

Profile BACnet Building Controller (B‐BC) with outlined enhanced features.  

17.  Shall contain a “FIPS 140‐2 Level 1 Inside” cryptographic module. 18.  System controller shall be available with an optional NEMA 1 enclosure with separate 

compartments for Class 1 and Class 2 wiring connections. a.  Enclosure shall support power input power of 120‐277VAC or 347VAC. 

B.   OpenADR Interface  

1.    Product Series: nADR  

2.    System shall provide an interface to OpenADR protocol Demand Response Automation Servers (DRAS) typically provided by local electrical utility. 

 

3.    OpenADR interface shall meet all of the requirements of Open ADR 2.0a Virtual End Nodes (VEN), including: 

 

a.  Programmable with the account information of the end‐user’s electrical utility DRAS account credentials. 

 

4.    OpenADR interface shall support the activation of system profiles configured for each of the automated demand response levels defined in the utility demand response program. 

   2.5  Wireless Networked Devices 

 

A.   Wireless Networked Sensor Interface  

1.    Product Series: XPA SIAC2 L2  

2.    The wireless sensor interface shall integrate industry standard low voltage switching devices and contact closure outputs into the control network. 

 

3.    The device interface shall have a universal power supply that operates at 120, 208, 240 or 277 VAC. 

 

4.    The device shall be listed to the UL 916 standard to allow field installation.  

5.    The device shall be listed to the UL 2043 listing for mounting in a plenum.  

6.    The device interface shall provide low voltage input channels suitable for connecting to momentary contact wall switches and dry contact outputs from other systems. 

 

7.    The device shall be capable of broadcasting the following manual wall control commands: on, off, and adjust dim level. 

Page 190: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 15 of 21

B.   Wireless Networked Light Controllers  

1.    Product Series: XPA RLx DSI  

2.    The wireless light controller shall have a line voltage relay and 0‐10V dimming output suitable for control of commercial and industrial lighting including fluorescent, HID, induction and LEDs. 

 

3.    Device shall have an integrated non‐removable antenna for wireless communication.  

4.    The wireless light controller shall have a universal power supply that operates at 120, 208, 240 or 277VAC. 

 

5.    The device shall be listed under the UL 916 standard to allow field installation.  

6.    The device shall have optional measurement capability of the amperage, voltage, wattage, and watt‐hours of its controlled lighting. 

 

a.  Amperage and current measurements shall be accurate to +/‐ 2%.  

b.   Wattage measurement shall account for power factor of the load, so that real active power is reported by the system instead of apparent power. 

 

7.   Wireless light controller options shall be available that support the following minimum relay specifications: 

 

a.  Normal power, 5A relay  

b.    Emergency power, 5A relay (UL924 listed)  

c.  Emergency power, no relay (UL924 listed); still provides 0‐10V dimming control and power measurement of the load while providing unswitched and “fail‐on” operation of the lighting load. 

 

C.   Wireless Networked Digital Sensors  

1.    Product Series: XPA DS ES7, XPA DS SBG  

2.    Digital sensors provide integrated digital occupancy sensing and digital photocell sensor suitable for embedding into the enclosure of a luminaire. 

 

3.    Digital sensor shall have the following form factors and lens types:  

a.  High‐mounting height (15‐45’), 360° PIR with minimum 15’ detection radius, and photocell. 

 

b.    Low‐mounting height (up to 15’), extended range 360° PIR with up to 30’ detection radius and photocell. 

 

c.  Micro‐sensor form factor, 360° PIR and photocell. 

D.   Wireless Networked Sensor‐Controllers 

1.    Product Series: XPA CMxB, XPA SBOx  

2.    Sensor‐Controllers shall integrate the following functions in to a single enclosure:  

a.  Line voltage relay and 0‐10V dimming control of a lighting load.  

b.    Power measurement of lighting load (voltage, amperage, watts, and watt‐hours). 

c.  Digital PIR occupancy sensor. 

Page 191: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 16 of 21

d.   Digital photocell sensor.  

e.    User button used to provide diagnostic and factory‐default reset capabilities.  

3.    Sensor‐Controllers shall mount to luminaires or junction boxes with a secured chase nipple suitable for ½” KO mounting holes. 

 

4.    Sensor‐Controller options shall be available that support the following minimum enclosure, relay, and lens specifications: 

 

a.  Enclosure Types  

1)   Damp location, including optional offset bracket to locate the sensor lens to avoid detection cutoff from the luminaire. 

 

2)   Wet location, IP65 rated enclosure or better, including optional back heights and nipple extension lengths to locate the sensor lens to avoid detection cutoff from the luminaire. 

 

b.    Relay Types  

1)   Normal power, 5A relay.  

2)    Emergency power, 5A relay (UL924 listed).  

3)    Emergency power, no relay (UL924 listed); still provides 0‐10V dimming control and power measurement of the load while providing unswitched and “fail‐on” operation of the lighting load. 

 

c.  Lens Types  

1)    “No lens,” which has no occupancy sensing or photocell sensing capability but allows the Sensor‐Controller to be used purely as an externally mounted lighting control device. 

 

2)   High‐mounting height (15‐45’), 360° PIR with minimum 15’ detection radius, and photocell. 

 

3)    Low‐mounting height (up to 15’), extended range 360° PIR with up to 30’ detection radius and photocell. 

E.    Wireless Networked Luminaires 

1.    Product Series: Networked Luminaires shall be of the following Acuity Brands LED series, which come factory enabled with embedded wireless networking capability: 

 

a.  Holophane Indoor model families: EMW EVT4 PHG PHS PHZ PHZL PLED VL 

Page 192: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 17 of 21

b.    Lithonia Enclosed & Gasketed model families: DMW2 LED FHE LED VAP LED 

 

c.  Lithonia High Bay model families: IBG IBH IBL JCBL JHBL 

 

d.    Lithonia Parking Garage model families: DSXPG PGX 

 

2.    Networked luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device.  

3.    Networked LED luminaire shall be capable of communicating wirelessly to other networked luminaires or intelligent control devices (sensors, photocells, wallstations). 

 

F.  Wireless Network Communication Bridge  

1.    Product Series: XPA BRG  

2.    A communication bridge device shall be provided that interfaces the System Controller with wireless networked devices. 

 

3.    Device shall consume no more than 6 W of power.  

4.    Device shall be capable of communicating with a group of at least 250 wireless networked devices and luminaires, so as to reduce the amount of communication bridges required in the system. 

 

5.    Device shall be supplied with mounting hardware suitable for wall mounting in a utility or data closet. 

 

6.    To provide security, the wireless bridge shall be unresponsive to wired and wireless communication that do not conform to the specific protocols used by the networked lighting control system. 

   2.6  Wired Networked Devices 

 

A.   Wired Networked Wallstations  

1.    Product Series: nPODM, nPODM xS  

2.    Devices shall recess into single‐gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.  

3.    Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ‐45 connectors. 

 

4.    All wallstations shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate a potential wiring issue. 

 

5.    Devices with mechanical push‐buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback. 

Page 193: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 18 of 21

6.    Devices with mechanical push‐buttons shall be made available with custom button labeling.  

7.   Wallstations shall support the following device options:  

a.  Number of control zones or scenes:  1, 2 or 4 

b.    Control Types Supported: 

1)   On/Off  

2)   Preset Scene  

3)   Global Profile  

c.  Colors:  Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray, Black, Red  

B.   Wired Networked Graphical Wallstations  

1.    Product Series: nPOD GFX  

2.    Device shall surface mount to single‐gang switch box.  

3.    Device shall have a 3.5” full color touch screen.  

4.    Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply. 

 

5.    Device shall have a micro‐USB style connector for local computer connectivity.  

6.    Communication shall be over standard low voltage network cabling with RJ‐45 connectors.  

7.    Device shall enable user supplied screen saver image to be uploaded within one of the following formats:  jpg, png, gif, bmp, tif. 

 

8.    Control Types Supported:  

a.  On/Off  

b.    Preset Scene 

c.  Global Profile 

9.    Graphic wall stations shall support the following device options:  

a.  Number of control zones:  Up to 16 

b.   Number of scenes:  Up to 16 

c.  Colors:  Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray, Black  

C.   Wired Networked Auxiliary Input / Output (I/O) Devices  

1.    Product Series: nIO 1s, nIO X  

2.    Devices shall be plenum rated and be inline wired, screw mountable, or have an extended chase nipple for mounting to a ½” knockout. 

 

3.    Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ‐45 connectors. 

Page 194: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 19 of 21

4.    Auxiliary Input/Output Devices shall be specified as an input or output device with the following options: 

 

a.  Contact closure input  

b.    RS‐232/RS‐485 digital input  

5.    Input supports activation of global scenes and profiles. 

D.   Wired Networked Communication Bridge 

1.    Product Series: nBRG  

2.    Device shall surface mount to a standard 4” x 4” square junction box.  

3.    Device shall have 8 RJ‐45 ports for connection to lighting control zones (up to 128 devices per port), additional network bridges, and System Controller. 

 

4.    Device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting control zones for purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to System Controller. 

 

5.    Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply, or powered via low voltage network connections from powered lighting control devices (e.g. power packs). 

 

6.   Wired Bridge shall be capable of redistributing power from its local supply and connected lighting control zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power. This architecture also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on network lighting control system. 

Page 195: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 20 of 21

PART 3 – EXECUTION  

3.1  Installation Requirements  

A.    Installation Procedures and Verification  

1.    The successful bidder shall review all required installation and pre‐startup procedures with the manufacturer’s representative through pre‐construction meetings. 

 

2.    The successful bidder shall install and connect the networked lighting control system components according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions, wiring diagrams, the project submittals and plans specifications. 

 

3.    The successful bidder shall be responsible for testing of all low voltage network cable included in the bid. Bidder is responsible for verification of the following minimum parameters: 

 

a.  Wire Map (continuity, pin termination, shorts and open connections, etc.)  

b.    Length  

c.  Insertion Loss  

B.    Coordination with Owner’s IT Network Infrastructure  

1.    The successful bidder is required to coordinate with the owner’s representative to secure all required network connections to the owner’s IT network infrastructure. 

 

a.  The bidder shall provide to the owner’s representative all network infrastructure requirements of the networked lighting control system. 

 

b.    The bidder shall provide to the manufacturer’s representative all necessary contacts pertaining to the owner’s IT infrastructure, to ensure that the system is properly connected and started up. 

 

C.   Documentation and Deliverables  

1.    The installing contractor shall be responsible for documenting installed location of all networked devices, including networked luminaires. This includes responsibility to provide as‐built plan drawing showing device address barcodes corresponding to locations of installed equipment. 

 

2.    The installing contractor is also responsible for the following additional documentation to the manufacturer’s representative if visualization / graphical floorplan software is provided as part of bid package: 

 

a.  As‐Built floor plan drawings showing daisy‐chain wired network control zones outlined, in addition to device address locations required above. All documentation shall remain legible when reproducing\scanning drawing files for electronic submission. 

 

b.    As‐Built electrical lighting drawings (reflected ceiling plan) in PDF and CAD format. Architectural floor plans shall be based on as‐built conditions. 

 

1)   CAD files shall have layers already turned on/off as desired to be shown in the graphical floorplan background images. The following CAD elements are recommended to be hidden to produce an ideal background graphical image:  

Page 196: SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT …Blvd, Room 216, Administration Building, Mobile, AL 36602 by 11:00 AM CDT, on Wednesday, September 18, 2019. Late or Faxed or Electronic submitted

Page 21 of 21

Text‐ Inclusive of room names and numbers, fixture tags and drawings notes Fixture wiring and homeruns Control devices Hatching or poché of light fixtures or architectural elements 

 

2)   CAD files shall be of AutoCAD 2013 or earlier. Revit file overall floor plan views shall be exported to AutoCAD 2013. 

 

  3.2  System Startup 

 

A.   Upon completion of installation by the installer, including completion of all required verification and documentation required by the manufacturer, the system shall be started up and programmed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. 

1.    Low voltage network cable testing shall be performed prior to system startup. 

B.    System start‐up and programming shall include: 1.    Verifying operational communication to all system devices. 2.    Programming the network devices into functional control zones to meet the required 

sequence of operation. 3.    Programming and verifying all sequence of operations. 4.    Customization of owner’s software interfaces and applications. 

C.    Initial start‐up and programming is to occur on‐site. Additional programming may occur on‐site or remotely over the Internet as necessary. 

 

  3.3  Project Turnover 

 

A.    System Documentation  

1.    Submit software database file with desired device labels and notes completed. Changes to this file will not be made by the factory. 

 

B.   Owner Training  

1.    Provisions for onsite training for owner and designated attendees to be included in submittal package. 

 

    

End of Section